Home
User`s Manual - Lakewood Automation
Contents
1. ata to be saved Scene dala J Scene O Scene group data ri j O oyelem dal System Scene group data 4 When scene data is selected tap to select the scene number that is to be the save target Scene dala J cene T 5 Specify the save destination folder and file name ast inal ion File mame UEBbisk Scene se 98 Saving Settings Data to RAMDisk USB Device FZ3 User s Manual 6 Tap OK asi inai lon File name hielee Hele OF Cance The window showing transfer status is displayed and the data is sent to the save destination FZ3 User s Manual Saving Settings Data to RAMDisk USB Device 99 eyeq Bulpeo7 bulaes gt e1eq Bulpeo7 bulaes gt Logged image data in the controller memory is saved to RAMDisk or USB memory Reference About Saving Areas p 94 1 When saving to USB memory plug a USB memory device into the controller 2 On the Main screen tap Data Save to file The Save to File window is displayed 3 Tap Logging image and select the file to save Setting data ta to be saved Select image All logging image Saves all the logging images Data to be saved Select image Saves the selected logging image Tap and select the image to save 4 Specify the save destination folder tination Folder name Paras AE 5 Tap OK
2. Set value Setting item Factory default Description Address setting Set the IP address of the controller When Obtain an IP address automatically is selected the IP address of the controller will be automatically obtained When Use the following IP address is selected set the IP address subnet mask and the default gateway address Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 IP address c 0 to 255 Input the controller IP address d 0 to 255 10 5 5 100 0 0 0 0 to Subnet mask 255 255 255 255 Input the subnet mask address 255 255 255 0 124 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual a b c d a 1 to 223 Default b 0 to 255 gateway c 0 to 255 Input the default gateway address d 0 to 255 10 5 5 110 a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 DNS server c 0 to 255 Input the DNS server address d 0 to 255 10 5 5 1 Input Output setting Input mode _ Normal This item cannot be changed Input form ASCII This item cannot be changed a b c d a 1 to 225 b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 Input Output 0 to 65535 Set the port No to use for data I O with the port No 9600 controller Input the output destination IP address 3 Tap PLC Link The PLC Link Setting window is displayed 4 Set the following items Ethernet PLC Link
3. 12 13 DATA6 Output data 6 14 15 DATA7 Output data 7 Signal Signal name Function Output data The data set in the output processing items is output DATAO 7 0 7 When there are multiple processing items data is overwritten to this area while handshaking is performed Command Control PLC Link This section explains each command used in PLC Link Measurement control command lowerc Upper CH Function References 0010 1010 Reference Details p 131 0010 1020 Reference Details p 132 0010 1030 Reference Details p 132 0010 2010 Reference Details p 133 0010 3010 Reference Details p 133 0010 F010 Reference Details p 134 Scene control command oaar Ci Function References Settings acquisition change command E Function References Executing Measurement Executes FZ3 User s Manual measurement one time Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 131 SOOIAGQ JEUO XJ y m BuljeoluNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ JEUO XJ y m BulyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt Command PLC t o Controller Command area Command EL E E top channel code 15 12 1 4 3 0 i 2 1010 0001 0000 0001 0000 earaarnimand 3 0010 0000 0000 0001 0000 codes Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area Description top channel 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command cade 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000
4. Setting Command ares Area cro Area CIO Address i m Response ares Aree CIO Area Clo z Address i P00 J Date Quiput ores Area i ClO Area tiO Address O w Relry interval ma TIN mE E FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 125 S 9JA9q Jeu1ax3 y m Bugesiunwwon pue Hunosuuo JO SPON gt SOOIAAQ Jeu1ax7 y m Bugesiunwwon pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt TORN Set value _ Setting item POr e Description Command area CIO Area ClO Work Area WR Mies Holding Bit Area HR Set the communication Auxiliary Bit Area AR area DM Area DM EM Area EMO 0 to 99999 Set the communication Address 0 address Response area CIO Area ClO Work Area WR Ries Holding Bit Area HR Set the communication Auxiliary Bit Area AR area DM Area DM EM Area EMO Address 0 to 99999 Set the communication 100 address Data output area CIO Area CIO Work Area WR Area Holding Bit Area HR Set the communication Auxiliary Bit Area AR area DM Area DM EM Area EMO E 0 to 99999 Set the communication 200 address Retry interval ms 1000 to 999999 Set the communication 10000 EN 5 Tap OK The settings are confirmed and the Ethernet window closes Checking Communication Status Use PLC tools etc to check the communication status Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 PLC Link Communicat
5. Support backlashing using phase B re ee Set value ae Setting item Facon aarti Description l Phase A l Trigger signal Phase Z Sets the trigger signal When phase A Every trigger pulse fn feet Every rotation Pulse Z Sets the timing for resetting STEP Phase A 0 to 65536 Sets the pulse width Support Checked Sets whether the rotation direction is backlashing Unchecked detected Trigger in Checked Sets whether a trigger is produced backlashing Unchecked during reverse rotation When phase Z Pulse reset Every trigger pulse timing STEP Phase Z Sets the pulse width Setting the STEP Input Detection Pulse Width STEP Setting Sets the timing for resetting This setting is performed as a countermeasure against STEP input chattering and to prevent operation malfunctions due to entrance of noise When Filter Setting Value Is 100 us Initial Value The STEP signal is detected as being on at the point it is on continuously for at least 100 us and measurement begins at this point Accordingly STEP signal detection is delayed by an amount of time equivalent to the set filter value Also when turning from ON to OFF the OFF filter fixed at 500 us is activated and the STEP signal is detected as OFF when it is off for at least 500 us 116 Setting the System Operation Environment FZ3 User s Manual 1 When there is no chattering ON is detected when the ON status con
6. Copying or deleting can be done by scene group and scene groups can be arbitrarily renamed Note Make sure to check that a USB memory device has been inserted before performing this operation 1 On the Main screen tap Scene Scene maintenance The Scene Maintenance window is displayed 2 Tap Edit Er ari ao Scene 1 2 Scene 2 The Scene Group Maintenance window is displayed 3 Select the scene group to copy and tap Copy 4 Select the copy destination scene group and tap Paste The confirmation window for overwriting is displayed 5 Tap Yes The copied scene group data is written over the scene group selected as the destination 6 Tap Close FZ3 User s Manual Editing Scene Groups 55 MO 4 JUsLUaINSes sauss Bues Deleting a Scene Group Delete scene group data The data to be deleted is shown as follows Names set for a scene group All scene data within a scene group 2 Tap Edit cene Er MO 4 JUSLUaINSes SoUsDS Buas cane cere Scene Scene Scene acenes ocana Scene j oceng acene scene scene Scene i Scene 5 scene Scene ocene Scene A confirmation message is displayed 4 Tap Yes Scene group data is deleted 1 On the Main screen tap Scene Scene maintenance The Scene Maintenance window is displayed cup Scene group nans i E Pesoene 2 A hece A The Scene Group Maintenance window
7. Item Through Freeze Description The latest image is always loaded from the camera and displayed When Through is selected saved images cannot be called up for measurement The image that was scanned in the immediately preceding measurement is displayed Images can be updated at any time during measurement 70 Arranging the RUN Window FZ3 User s Manual The latest NG error image resulting from an overall judgement is displayed The latest measurement results are always shown in overall judgement and measurement time In this case the overall judgement result and measurement time may conflict with the camera images Also during continuous measurement Last NG cannot be displayed Last NG Note Tapping the Image Display area or flow when Last NG is displayed and made active clears the screen Be sure to capture Last NG before performing any other operation lf a measurement trigger is input during multi input status or immediately after BUSY is turned off during display update processing etc Last NG cannot be displayed Display Last NG Image fulfills a similar function as a processing item in which up to 4 NG error images can be saved I f this processing item is used Last NG can be acquired without operation having any effect on acquisition FZ3 User s Manual Arranging the RUN Window 71 uogesado Bulweis juUswWeiNses s Burwood v uogesado Bulels juUswWeINses s L Burwood Oo
8. Property window u Window for setting conditions for processing units processing items registered in the scene set in the flow This window can also be displayed directly from the Main screen ADJUST window Layout of Main Screen ADJUST Window This screen is used to check whether measurement is being performed correctly according to the set conditions FZ3 User s Manual Layouts of Screens Windows 9 uoneledO aojeg A Scene Vow Measure Data System Help ADJ UST Ocene Mat a Edn flow Pi Gate save Ei tom ewitch ms E eg hs oi E DUA p CHM IaH oooO ol cilve leaga imaj a laigs noa Thra Pa Ghom cer Tee LI a Menu Bar Select operations and settings menus related to measurement b Measurement Information Display Area 0 Scene group o 0 Scene 0 Signal output OFF Freeze 1 Overall judgement Displays a scene s overall judgement result OK NG 2 Processing time Displays the time required for the measurement process 3 Status display Displays the scene group number scene number external output status and image mode for the currently displayed scene C Toolbar Commonly used functions appear in the toolbar Edit flow The Edit Flow window is displayed Addition and deletion of processing units and switching of the processing sequence is performed in the Edit Flow window Data save Setting data is
9. Useful Functions for Operation diust settiing aiaa lnaca file Skip FZ3 User s Manual RAMD i sk 5 Wew folder gt New folder 1 4 4 USBD isk Tap the Move Image file button Tap the Skip button to skip processing and remeasure the next image Changing Judgement Conditions without Stopping Measurement Using the simplified non stop adjustment function makes it possible to change the judgement conditions of processing units of the currently displayed scene without stopping the measurement processing being executed The simplified non stop adjustment function can only be used in RUN window normal mode It cannot be used in the ADJUST window or RUN window fast view mode Ifthe Enter Simplified Non stop Adj button is not displayed the button can be added with the System Controller Create shortcut 1 In the Control area of the Main screen RUN window tap Tool box 2 Tap Enter simplified non stop adj Transfers to simplified non stop adjustment mode Simplified non stop adjustment is displayed at the upper part of the Control area flow Measurement will continue without stopping FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 79 uogesado Bulweys juUswWeiNses s BUIWOLIEd v uogesado BulweysjuUswWaINses s BUIWUOLIEd Oo 80 Switch to ADJUST mode Enter simplified non stop adj 3 Tap the icon of the processing unit with the judgement condition to be adjust
10. Item name Indicates the item names displayed on the screen Version Upgrade Information The newly added functions are described here Revision history from Version 2 0 to 2 1 Added Function Note on Newly Added Function Reference in Manual Shape Search Measurement is now possible even when the size of clerics A Handling size change measurement objects change petit ar Vanes ane g J J Search p 94 2D Code Measurement is now possible for white 2D codes on Reference Processing Item Support code colors black backgrounds List Manual 2D Codet p 265 6 FZ3 User s Manual Before Operation FZ3 User s Manual This chapter describes the basic flow and preparations before beginning operation Reference i Reference Reference i Reference Reference Reference Reference Operation Flow p 8 Layouts of Screens Windows p 9 Checking System Configuration p 18 Preparing Controllers and Cameras p 19 Input Operations p 21 Returning Controller to Factory Settings p 23 Saving Settings and Turning Power Off p 24 uoneJedO aojag Operation flow is explained here 9 uoneledO aojeg Measurement Operation Utilizing Aanlyzing 8 Operation Flow Before starting it is necessary to take measurements and make adjustments of the cameras b Before Operation Creates edits a measurement flow b Setting Scenes Measurement Flow 1 Perform a test me
11. No Data name Judge Peak edge position X Peak edge position Y Bottom edge position X Bottom edge position Y Edge position X Ave Edge position Y Ave Long distance Max Long distance Min Short distance Max Short distance Min Deviation Angle Lost point Linear coefficient A Linear coefficient B Linear coefficient C Reference X Reference Y Output Coordinates Calibration Reflect to overall judgement Edge color specification Edge color R Edge color G Edge color B Difference R Difference G Difference B Detection mode Reference X Reference Y Edge No Edge Level Noise Level Noise width Edge color level Upper limit of the maximum edge position X FZ3 User s Manual Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Get only 0 to 99999 9999 Get only 0 to 99999 9999 Get only 0 to 99999 9999 Get only 0 to 99999 9999 Get only 1 to 99999 9999 Get only 1 to 99999 9999 Get only 1 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX Get only 1 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX Get only 1 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX Get only 1 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX Get only 1 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX Get only 180 to 180 Get only O to 100 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Get only O to 99999 9999 Get only 0 to 99999 9999 0 After scroll peur 1 Before scroll 0 OFF Set Get 4 ON 0 ON Set Get 1 OFF 0 O
12. OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC e THE AMERICAS HEADQUARTERS Schaumburg IL USA e 847 843 7900 800 556 6766 www omron247 com OMRON CANADA INC HEAD OFFICE OMRON ARGENTINA e SALES OFFICE Toronto ON Canada 416 286 6465 866 986 6766 www omron ca Cono Sur 54 11 4787 1129 OMRON ELETR NICA DO BRASIL LTDA HEAD OFFICE OMRON CHILE e SALES OFFICE Sao Paulo SP Brasil e 55 11 2101 6300 www omron com br Santiago 56 2206 4592 OMRON ELECTRONICS MEXICO SA DE CV e HEAD OFFICE OTHER OMRON LATIN AMERICA SALES Apodaca N L e 52 811 156 99 10 mela omron com 56 2206 4592 Cat No Z290 E1 01 12 08 Note Specifications are subject to change 2008 Omron Electronics LLC Printed in U S A
13. Set value Factory Description default D ARa UER A password is not used for operation using the RUN window password A password is used when the following operations are performed with the RUN window Place a check next to the operation items for which a password is to be Usea set ATi Switch to ADJUST mode P Simplified non stop adjustment Control area operation Tool box operation Password l l handing Tapping this button displays the Password Changing window Note No passwords are set with the default settings When setting passwords for the first time tap Password changing and set a password Setting or changing a password 1 On the Password Setting window tap Password changing 2 Tap Passed charging Old passvord Hew passord The soft keyboard is displayed 3 Set Old password and New password Use 16 characters or less to Input words 118 Setting the System Operation Environment FZ3 User s Manual 4 Tap OK The display returns to the Password Setting window 3 Tap OK A confirmation message is displayed 4 Tap OK Poseword ls changed The Password Setting window closes portant ccc Please contact us if you forget the passwords you set Checking System Information System Information The controller model and measurement application version can be checked 1 On the Main screen tap System Controller System initialization
14. 1 Register a reference model Register the package E markings as a model Model Status and Measurement Processing Measurement time and accuracy may be affected by the status of model in the following ways Please select measurement objects that are in good condition clean for Model Registration In the case of large or complicated models processing time is prolonged With extremely small models or models without features search processing is unstable 2 Perform rough search of overall measurement region Search for the model over the entire measurement region Search range Search model range o ee n 3 Perform additional searching near the model e Model Search Detection Method With search processing there are two types of detection methods Search by Correlation CR and search by Shape PT The detection method can be selected by changing the Rotation settings for each processing item Setting item Description Measurement for locations where there is high correlation similar areas between the color of the CR model registration image and the input image is performed Since brightness is normalized in this operation changes in brightness do not affect searching for correct positions FZ3 User s Manual Measurement Mechanism 263 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy Measurement for locations where there is a high degree of similarity between the shape of the mode
15. 52 Editing Scenes FZ3 User s Manual 3 Tap Clear A confirmation message is displayed 4 Tap Yes Scene data is cleared 5 Tap Close Arbitrary descriptions can be added to each scene This is convenient for making settings more easily understandable when managing many scenes 1 On the Main screen tap Scene Scene maintenance The Scene Maintenance window is displayed 2 Tap the scene to be renamed from scene list FZ3 User s Manual Editing Scenes 53 MO 4 JUsLUaINSes SoUsDS Buas MO 4 JUsLUaINSes SoUsDS Bues 3 Set Scene name Author and Note Scene grous i Fi Smilch Scene group name Scene group O SEAMA scene 1 Scene T z scene J Seene d Spone Soene amp CF Copy aSpa f Scene Scene ocane Ii SEARE I Seana Iz Scene 13 ccene ld SS SS SS e Ee a a e Se yt i mes SS 1 E La T a E pi AJ a i a i a ih 7 1 Tap for each item The soft keyboard is displayed 2 Set the name and a description Scene name and Author cannot be longer than 15 characters and Note cannot be longer than 255 characters and cannot be used alone as a Scene name Note When writing Note enter a line break after 32 single byte characters or 17 double byte characters Without a line break the display of character strings is truncated 4 Tap Close 54 Editing Scenes FZ3 User s Manual
16. Elliptic axis angle Elliptic major axis Elliptic mainor axis Ratio for flat approximate ellipse Width of circumscribed rectangle 9 Height of circumscribed rectangle COND OBRWDN CO N 0 to 2 Extraction condition Set Get 10 Upper left X coordinate of circumscribed rectangle 11 Upper left Y coordinate of circumscribed rectangle 12 Perimeter 13 Circularity 14 Major axis of rotating rectangle 15 Minor axis of rotating rectangle 16 Radius of inscribed circle 17 Radius of circumscribed circle 18 Number of holes 603 N x 10 fo Ts N 0to2 Upper limit of extraction condition Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 604 Nx10 ta X N 0to2 Lower limit of extraction condition Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 700 Nx10 ie N 0 to2 Judgement condition Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 701 N x 10 Display selection flag for feature 0 ON N Oto2 quantity 1 OFF 702 N x 10 Upper limit of judgement condition for POC CREME CCC CRC er N 0to2 feature quantity 703 N x 10 Lower limit of judgement condition for Set Get ogaao oodo 0000000 N 0to2 feature quantity 1000 N Judgement condition feature quantity N 0 to 99 0 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 1100 N Judgement condition feature quantity N 0 to 99 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 1200 N Judgement condition feature quantity N 0 to 99 Get only 999999999 999
17. The System Information window is displayed 2 Check the information The controller model and measurement application version can be checked Hodal Fet Hee Sofware version Wer 00 FORE Ma 25 Henory slale 3 Tap Memory state The following information can be checked Eloate Available application memory The application memory is the memory used by all applications By confirming remaining capacity this provides a rough standard for confirming status while operating Available data memory The data memory is the amount of memory that can be used for scene group data Check the available memory that can be used for unit data and settings data for each unit 4 Tap Close The System Information window closes FZ3 User s Manual Setting the System Operation Environment 119 JUBWUOJIAUQ wazs S y BulbuUeUD o JUBWUOJIAUQ Wa1SAS y BulbueUD oO 120 Setting the System Operation Environment FZ3 User s Manual Methods for Connecting and Communicating with External Devices FZ3 User s Manual This chapter describes communication with external devices such as PCs and programmable controllers etc i Reference About Connecting with External Devices p 122 i Reference Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link p 123 i Reference Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure p 145 i Reference Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication
18. s BUIWOLIEd Oo 2 From the measurement flow tap the processing unit to be displayed Flow lst AWG unit Next NG unid ig nner mage Input H 1 Edgs Position i 2 Search 3 Set each item in Image display of the Control area image display mace layout fi image F Ackive image Image number nage mode Positions Sub imece Item Image mode Positions Sub image Fre ele ON OFF image 0 Description This item changes the camera image mode Reference Image Mode List p 70 Measurement results are displayed as a list in the Image Display area Display contents are classified into Input image units such as Camera Image Input and Camera Switching and Compensate image units such as Filtering and Position Compensation For example if Positions is turned on with Position Compensation selected a combined positions list for units after Position Compensation is displayed The units in the area before Position Compensation are not displayed Indicates displayable image for the selected processing item Reference List of sub image numbers p 72 Note To check detailed results for each unit when Positions is on select any unit after selecting the Detail result area to make detailed results active To make detailed results inactive select the Image Display area Image Mode List Changes can be made in the ADJUST window
19. the software version is 2 00 and the date is Sept 25th 2008 lt Command gt VIEIRIGIEIT r FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 175 S 9JA9 JEUJO XJ y m BuljeoluNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt lt Response gt F Z 3 IX XI X Iv elr 2 lolo 12 0 0 8 0 9 2 5 e OKeR Output Format Non procedure If the processing unit Data Output is set in a scene measurement results are sequentially output starting from the smallest data No set in Setting of Data Output Reference Processing ltem List Manual Data Output p 398 When Outputting ASCII Data Set the output format as ASCII in Setting of the Data Output processing item The factory settings default value is ASCH Output format The output format number of digits and the data separator etc can be changed if necessary Reference Processing Item List Manual Data Output p 398 Example Integer digits 5 digits decimal places 3 digits negative numbers field separator comma record separator delimiter 11213 4151 I617I8I SI6I7 S211 716 19 2 14 61519187 1161515 L d ieee J na j Data measuwementvalue Data 1 measurement value Data 2 measuremert value Data 7 measurement value Field separator Record separator Note Field separators are not output
20. 129 S 9JA9 JEUO XJ y m BuljeoluNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINGQ JEUJO XJ y m BuljealuNWWOD pue Hunosuuo JO SPON gt CMD PARAM Command parameter Stores command parameters Response Area Controller to PLC FZ3 Response area 9 38 7 5 e 4 3 2 o Name pt tt S Bt or control output pt i ft TT fone top channel 19 11 10 0 1 2 3 CMD CODE 4 5 RES CODE 6 7 8 9 oF RES DATA Signal Signal name CMD FLG Command completion bit GATE Data output completion bit BUSY command execution in progress bit CMD CODE Command code RES CODE Response code RES DATA Response data Output Area Controller to PLC FZ3 Output area top channel 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Function 2CH Command code 2CH Response code 2CH Response data Length changeable Turns on when command execution is complete Turns on when data output is complete Turns on when command execution is in progress Returns the executed command code Stores the response from the executed command Stores the response data from the executed command Bit e u enol i ee eee DATAO DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATAS 130 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link Name Output data 0 Output data 1 Output data 2 Output data 3 Output data 4 Output data 5 FZ3 User s Manual
21. 137 Reduction Set Get 10 to 100 0 No rotation 138 With rotation Set Get 1 With rotation 139 Lower limit of the rotation angle 180 to 180 140 Upper limit of the rotation angle 180 to 180 141 Skipping angle 1 to 30 0 No size change 142 Move axis i ines 3 Y change 143 Upper limit of the size change 50 to 150 144 Lower limit of the size change 50 to 150 145 Size change skipping 1 to 99 146 Reverse k Sane EC Circle Search No Data range sie ay 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 6 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 9 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 eminem sven A 204 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 102 Calibration Set Get 0 OFF 1 0N 0 Black 142 Target Set Get 1 White 2 Black and white vo poea jae ho 0 3x3 1 5x5 150 Mask size Set Get 0 7 xT 3 9x9 151 Edge extraction level Set Get 0 to 255 153 Upper limit of position X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 154 Lower limit of position X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 155 Upper limit of position Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 156 Lower limit of position Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 159 Upper limit of evaluation Set Get O to 100 160 Lower limit of evaluation Set Get O to 100 161 Upper limit of count Set Get 0 to 256 162 Lower limit of count Set Get 0 to 256 165 Upper limit of radius Set Get 0 to 99999 9999 166
22. 2 digits Second 2 digits 156 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Note lt Hour 2 digits gt lt Minute 2 digits gt and lt Second 2 digits gt can be omitted during setting Settings cannot be updated when these are omitted however and the previous time will be kept unchanged Allowable omission patterns include omitting lt second gt only omitting lt minute gt and lt second gt omitting lt hour gt lt minute gt and lt second gt Patterns that cannot be used include omitting lt hour gt only and omitting lt minute gt only Example When changing the date and time to 8 30 2007 12 30 00 lt Command gt DIAIT IE 2 0 0 7 JO 8 3 0 1 2 3 0 10 0 fe lt Response gt OlK ox DISPCOND Acquiring the current image display status Acquires the currently displayed image mode lt Command format gt lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally Display state OJK Fr When processing is not performed normally ER fer lt Parameters explanation gt 0 Through View State 1 Freeze or Freeze and Last NG together 2 Last NG Example When the current image mode is Through FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 157 S 9JA9q Jeu1ax7 y m Bugesiunwwon pue Hunosuuo JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljealuNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON g
23. Circle Ellipse Image selection status Points are displayed on the top bottom left right and lower right of the circle Dimension Adjustment Drag the points Example When zooming in on a circle Drag the point on the lower right of the circle Example When transforming a circle into a long horizontal ellipse Drag the point on the right of the circle to the right 284 Setting Figures a ec S End point t a ed de A FZ3 User s Manual r f i aR s T WO hy L q H F i i rd Bag f PF am Ss Using numbers for setting The window for settings is split into two Setting is performed through input of numbers or through tapping on the arrows Ellipse Ell ipu Al Center Position t Center Fosit ion atil am E Ce e 3 4 4 Radius X pr Radius Y Hb Circumference Image selection status Points are displayed on the top bottom left and right of both the inner and outer circles Dimension Adjustment Drag the points Example When enlarging the entire circumference Drag a point on the outer circle FZ3 User s Manual Setting Figures 285 sexipueddy joo Se ee et Example When adjusting the width of the circumference Drag a point on the inner circle Using numbers for setting The window for settings is split into two Setting is performed through input of numbers or through tapping on the arrows fide circl
24. Gutput polarity fon at NG ulputl control utput period as Gate ON delay as Output tine ms Timeout s Wusbar of delay i Dne shot OR si gre ____ Ouiewl time as 178 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual Item Output polarity Output control Output period Gate ON delay Output time Timeout Number of delay One shot OR signal Output time 3 Tap OK Set value Factory default None Handshaking Synchronization output 2 0 to 5000 0 ms 10 0 ms 1 0 to 1000 0 ms 1 0 ms 1 0 to 1000 0 ms 5 0 ms 0 5 to 120 0 S 10 0 s 1to15 1 ON OFF 0 1 to 1000 0 ms 5 0 ms Description Select whether to turn on OR and DOO to 15 when judgement result is OK or when it is NG Method to output measurement results without synchronizing with external devices Reference When Output Control Is Set to None p 184 Method to output measurement results while synchronizing with external devices Reference When Output Control Is Set to Handshaking p 186 Method to output measurement results while synchronizing with line processing timing The STEP signal is ignored the number of times set in Number of delay and measurement results are output when the STEP signal next turns on Reference When Output Control Is Set to Synchronization Output p 187 V
25. PLC to FZ3 DSA Data output request bits utput requ i FF C m Response area ON FZ3toPLC SAIE Data output completion bits utpu pleti bits Output area ON IERO F ae T 0to7 2 OFF 4 F234 1 After measurement completion the DSA is turned on from the PLC and data output is requested 2 The FZ3 outputs data After output is complete GATE is turned on 3 The PLC confirms that GATE has turned on loads data and then the DSA is turned off 4 The FZ3 confirms that the DSA has turned off and then GATE is turned off After measurement completion the DSA is turned on from the PLC and the next data output is requested 1 After the processing flow comes to the data output unit if the DSA is not turned off within the retry interval 0 to 999999 ms GATE is forcibly turned off and data output is ended Use caution as data will be deleted 2 If the DSA is not turned off within the retry interval 0 to 999999 ms GATE is forcibly turned off and output is ended 142 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Measurement Command Details Command to response Command area PLC to FZ3 Response area FZ3 to PLC Data output Command area PLC to FZ3 Response area FZ3 to PLC Output area FZ3 to PLC FZ3 User s Manual Measurement time A st data output 2nddataoutput ON CMD CODE Command code OFF N CMD PARAM i Command parameters OFF ON
26. Scene switch 2 Tap to select the scene to switch Scene group 0 3cene croup Switch Scene fa Scene e To switch a scene group tap Switch then tap in the displayed window to select the scene group to switch 3 Tap OK The scene switches Switching Scene Groups Switches to the scene group in which the scene to be edited is stored 1 On the Main screen tap Scene Scene maintenance The Scene Maintenance window is displayed 50 Switching Scenes and Scene Groups FZ3 User s Manual 2 Tap Switch for the scene group ScEnE ErOUP 1 8cene group 1 1 Scene group name i cene croup 1m Scene Q Copy amp Clear t Scene i fa 3 Stene i i ArAnA The Switch Scene Group window is displayed 3 Switch to the scene group to edit Scene group b ftene grove ie gene Dr a Eligh oer 1 Tap and select the scene group to edit 2 Select whether a scene group should be saved when switching to another scene group Setting Setting item Pires Description default Checked When the scene group is switched the data of the Saye scene scene group before switching is saved group on The scene group data is not saved when switching to switch scene Unchecked another scene group Therefore the switching period can be shortened Note The setting for whether to save a scene group during switching is linked
27. external reference table No 139 verification string of Character Inspection cannot be used 138 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Command PLC to Controller Command 7 Bit n one 11 8 7 4 3 0 Be appi Response Controller to PLC Response area Description top channel 15 12 2 0001 Command code 3 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Setting Date and Time Sets the date and time of the internal calendar timer in the controller Command PLC to Controller Command 7 P Bit or cn ae evil 11 8 7 4 3 0 Description FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 139 SOOINGQ Jeu1ax3 y m BulealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SINAC Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt Response Controller to PLC Response area top channel 2 3 4 5 15 12 0010 0000 0000 0000 11 8 7 4 3 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0101 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data Output PLC Link Description Command code Store response target command codes Response code Command execution result OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Either fixed point output or floating point output can be selected for data output Data Output p 398 Reference Timing Chart PLC Link This section e
28. of detections 181 Judgement lower limit of number of Set Get 0 to 100 detections 182 oe Upper IMEG MEASUTS seat 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 183 oe Ower imlo measur sauce 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 184 oe HP Per MInOnMeSSUNe bearer 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 185 ooo OWEN IMPOR Meas Une eiie 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 186 Judgement upper limit for angle Set Get 180 to 180 187 Judgement lower limit for angle Set Get 180 to 180 188 Judgement upper limit for Set Get 0 to 100 correlation value 189 Judgement lower limit for Set Get 0 to 100 correlation value 1000 Nx6 N 0 to 99 Correlation 0 to 99 Get O to 100 Pe ee Position X 0 to 99 Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 N 0 to 99 Poe NO ane Position Y 0 to 99 Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 N 0 to 99 1000 Nx6 3 N 0 to 99 Measurement angle 0 to 99 Get 180 to 180 1000 Nx6 4 ee bat N 0 to 99 Magnification MX 0 to 99 Get 90 to 110 1000 Nx6 5 nea bate N 0 to 99 Magnification MY 0 to 99 Get 90 to 110 FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 207 s jqe soudJajJoy eu1 x7 sojqe soudJejJoy eu1 x7 Classification No Data name Data range cay 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 1 No models found 5 Index 0 to 35 1 No models found 6 Model No 0to4 7 Correlation value O to 100 8 Measure X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 9 Measure Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 10 Angle 180 to 180 11 Refer
29. setting Communication Specifications Ethernet PLC Link Communication specifications such as link areas or communication speed and data length are set Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 PLC Link p 126 FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 123 SOOINAQ JEUJO XJ y m BuljeoluNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljealuNWWOD pue Bunoauuo JO SPON gt E ccc Before setting the communication specifications set the Serial Ethernet communication module to PLC link SYSMAC CS CJ CP One store to the controller then restart the system Reference gt Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 112 Use the same communication specification settings for the controller and the external device When making system settings Ethernet settings do not send external input into the Ethernet 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Communication Serial Ethernet The Ethernet window is displayed 2 Inthe communication setting area set the following items Ethemnet PLO Link selling Address sett ing C Obtain an IF address automatically f Use the following IF address IP address i i 5 zl 5 aal 100 Subnet mask p 255l asti afl COO Default gateway 0 ee l OWS server 18 S fl mm mn Ineul Oubput sett ing Qulput IF address OL m sO Ohad Input Output port No a600
30. setting time Note The output signal functions the same as when Output Control is set to None Reference When Output Control Is Set to None p 184 Input signal Signal Function This signal is used to request the next data transfer from external devices The controller does not output data until the DSA signal is ON Turn the DSA signal ON the next time The receiving system for external devices is complete DSA The controller has completed measurement The BUSY signal is on during measurement As a result the timing of when measurement is complete can be understood by observing the BUSY signal When Output Control Is Set to Synchronization Output This method enables synchronization between processing timing on the production line and timing for output of controller results After the STEP signal has turned on the number of times set in Number of delay in the communication specifications measurement results will be output the next time the STEP signal turns on FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 187 SOOINAQ JEUO XJ y m BuljealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljealuNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt Note When the communication specification Output Control is set to Synchronization output levels will be counted according to the number of times the STEP signal turns on For this reason perform settings so that results are output onl
31. 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Starting Continuous Measurement Start continuous measurement Command PLC to Controller Command area Command EL Daceuction top channel code 15 12 14 3 0 k 2 1020 0001 0000 0010 0000 Setcommand 3 0010 0000 0000 0001 0000 codes Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area Description top channel 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command cod 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Stopping Continuous Measurement Stops continuous measurement 132 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Command PLC to Controller Command area Command EL E E top channel code 15 12 1 4 3 0 i 2 1030 0001 0000 0011 0000 Sareaniand 3 0010 0000 0000 0001 0000 codes Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area Description top channel 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 2 0001 0000 0011 0000 Ganniana cede 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Clearing Measurement Values Clears all measurement values Command PLC to Controller Command area Comma
32. 1 1920000 Y_MAX 1 5003712 Maximum number of lines that can be 479 1199 2043 loaded FZ3 User s Manual Upper Limits of Processing Item Parameters 297 sexipueddy sexipueddy About Memories Usable with FZ Series The following types of memory can be used with the FZ series On board memory This is the area where images are temporarily stored when logging images using the logging function This uses ring memory and if the maximum number of images has been reached images are overwritten starting with the oldest This is cleared when the power is turned OFF RAM disk Image logging file data logging file and capture images can be saved As this is memory inside the FZ3 files can be saved and read faster than using USB memory However capacity is a fixed 40 MB Files saved in RAM disk are cleared when the power is turned OFF Application memory Memory used for all applications Memory area that is used temporarily by applications By confirming remaining capacity this provides a rough standard for confirming status while operating The user cannot access this memory Data memory Area for holding current settings details of scene group data If this capacity is exceeded adding units and copying scenes cannot be performed in edit flow Available data memory can be confirmed from the system menu Reference Checking System Information System Information p 119 298 About Memories Usable with FZ Series FZ3
33. 101 Output Coordinates Set Get a 1 Before scroll 102 Calibration Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 217 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy sojqe soudJajoy eu1 x7 120 Label unit Set Get None 1 to 9999 121 Label No Set Get 0 to 2499 122 Upper limit of the area Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 123 Lower limit of the area Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 124 Upper limit of gravity X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 125 Lower limit of gravity X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 126 Upper limit of gravity Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 127 Lower limit of gravity Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Labeling No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Number of labels Get only 0 to 2500 6 Reference X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 Reference Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Reference angle Get only 180 to 180 9 Gravity X coordinate Get only 0 to 9999 10 Gravity Y coordinate Get only 0 to 9999 20 Nx10 Measurement of feature quantities Setonly 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 N 0to7 forjudgement condition Se ee e 999999999 9999 to 9999999999999 N Oto7 judgement condition 22 Nx10 Min of feature quantity for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 N Oto7 condition oot INK 1 Measuremnentol B
34. 184 Scene Scene Group Switch Start Measurement Exit Measurement RUN ON DIO 6 X X OFF DI7 ON Y OFF y BUSY ON i Perform command Output signal Signal Function RUN Turns on when the controller is available for measurement and the RUN window is displayed Turns off in the ADJUST window Indicates that the controller is currently switching the scene or scene group Do not input next BUSY command while the BUSY signal is ON Otherwise on going processing or commands that are input will not be performed correctly FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 189 SOOIAGQ JEUO XJ y m BuljeoluNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOIAGQ JEUJO XJ y m BuljealuNWWOD pue Hunosuuo JO SPON gt Input signal Scene switching Signal DIO to 4 DI5 DI6 DI7 Function Set Scene No 0 to 31 ON OFF This is the execution trigger After DIO to 6 is set turn DI7 ON after an interval over 1 ms BUSY signal is ON during execution of commands After checking that the BUSY signal has turned on turn DI7 OFF and then turn DIO to 6 OFF Input signal Scene group switching Signal DIO to 4 DI5 DI6 DI7 Function Sets the scene group No 0 to 31 ON ON This is the execution trigger After DIO to 6 is set turn DI7 ON after an interval over 1 ms BUSY signal is ON during execution of commands After checking that the BUSY signal has turned on turn DI7 OFF and then turn DIO
35. 190 When Output Control Is Set to None The controller outputs measurement results without synchronizing with external devices Have the external devices detect the GATE signal of the controller and load measurement results during ON status Inputting a measurement trigger in the STEP signal Example When 3 expressions are set in Parallel Data Output Start Measurement Exite Measurement OFF RUN ON S STEP input OFF BUSY ON Perform Measurement OR X Final judgment DO OFF e attr GATE ON lt gt gt Rising tim oi Output time Output period Total output time Output period X number of output data Output signal Signal Function RUN Turns on when the controller is available for measurement and the RUN window is displayed It is OFF in the ADJUST window so switch to the RUN window during operation Indicates that controller is currently measuring or switching the scene Do not input next command BUSY while the BUSY signal is ON Otherwise on going processing or commands that are input will not be performed correctly Outputs overall judgement Selection of whether ON occurs during an OK judgement result or NG error judgement result can be performed in the communication specifications settings window Reference Setting Communication Specifications Parallel Interface p 178 OR Outputs the results for expressions set in the processing item Parallel Judgement Output Parallel
36. 750 10 FZ3 H750 FZ3 H750 10 FZ3 700 FZ3 700 10 FZ3 H700 FZ3 H700 10 LCD monitor FZ M08 Monitor cable a FZ VM lt Input device gt Mouse trackball commercially 1 Touch pen available item with USB interface EE PC Intelligent camera Auto focus camera i Ethernet FZ SLC15 FZ SLC100 FZ SZC15 FZ SZC100 da PLC es Parallel I O cable o h ZYP eee Stand alone 300 000 pixel L camera Color Monochrome camera FZ SC FZ S a 7 300 000 pixel Small size flat type Color Monochrome camera FZ SF FZ SFC S 300 000 pixel Small size pen type Color Monochrome camera FZ SP FZ SPC 3 2 million pixel2 Color Monochrome camera FZ SC2M FZ S2M Camera cable FZ VS Long distance camera cable FZ VS2 Bend camera cable FZ VSB Right angle camera cable FZ VSL Cable extension unit FZ VSJ Tol amp 4 5 million pixel camera Color Monochrome camera FZ SC5M FZ S5M CCTV lens and lighting are required 1 The touch pen is an accessory of a controller 2 FZ SC2M and FZ S2M cannot be connected with the FZ3 3 OO FZ3 H3 LIU controllers 3 Lenses for small size cameras are required for small size 300 000 pixel cameras 4 FZ SC5M and FZ S5M can only be connected with the FZ3 70 O FZ3 H70 O controllers 18 Checking System Configuration FZ3 User s Manual Preparing Controllers and Cameras Preparing Controllers No special preparation is required with this product as processing items are pre instal
37. 9 goat ao Result of Expression Z Resul of Expression Result of Expression 3 ai 4 Use Excel graphing and functions to process and analyze data For example the optimum threshold value can be calculated eee ERA 2r en oor Ns SS COR Ox S amp S Beh F A Eos E ae e PE Pri i i E E Fail E a E Pe 4 HE TA Po eS i B Es Pam moimi 2 a ee a Li tae SO 1 2 1 Oa Pari E a rj tao PO T Te i 18 Fas TORO R Ope A 10 AA 2 1c J jac Ta 2 1 i 4 ii Ts 2 a a 4 is PU 1 BS 4 E T 1S i H 135 Threshold values can be determined ta 1 L E BM catalogs jal m Comparing Logging Data and Logging Images Compare image and measurement data to confirm correctness and to make analyzing trends for when NG occurs easier The measurement data and image data stored through the logging function is associated through FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 89 uogesado Buleis jUsWeINses s L Burwood v uogesado BulweysjuUswWaINses s BUIWUOLIEd Oo measurement IDs based on the measurement date and time In this way measurement data can be made to always correspond with image data Verify data with the measurement ID Fe Da Ou View Pia Took p i pl Search ES Foer roa Prog ore FO RAL Oa al Logging image folder teeters oon 0a 1 2 ae Logging data Images are correlated with measured data via measurement ID Clearing Measure
38. BUSY on the PLC side Command PLC to Controller Command area top channel 2 3 Command code F010 0010 Response Controller to PLC 15 12 1111 0010 B 0000 0001 0000 0001 t There is no response because restarting is performed Acquiring Scene No Acquires the current scene No Command PLC to Controller Command area top channel 2 3 134 Command code 1000 0020 15 12 0001 0000 Bit Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 7 4 7 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0 Description Set command codes 3 0 Description Set command codes FZ3 User s Manual Response Controller to PLC t area Description top channel 15 12 11 8 1 4 3 0 2 0001 0000 3 0000 0000 4 0000 0000 Response B 0000 0000 Command code 0010 0000 Store response target command codes 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF 5 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data 0000 0000 Stores the acquired scene No Acquiring Scene Group No Acquires the current scene group No Command PLC to Controller Command area Command Bit DE Sn top channel code 15 12 1 4 3 0 i 2 2000 0010 0000 0000 0000 Seteonmiand 3 0020 0000 0000 0010 0000 codes Response Controller to PLC Response Bit ace a ee 11 8 7 4 3 0 eleseqsitelt 3 0000 Store response
39. CCRC E E ee eT ec ee ee E Re Re oe eg ee eee ence ar eer eke 32 Creating a Scene TRE CMCC TEC ERT eT CEE CR eC ECR CER CONT RET CECE AE eR ee ee er eer ee ee er er rc a eee moe 33 Processing Item Selection Guidelines CG ae a a Dee E Wee E Lie Lae OTe a a a E Win ie a E we 35 Selecting Measurement Processing Items Using a Chart E E EE E eee re Re 35 Selecting Measurement Processing Items According to the Measurement Method and Purpose E A RE ER Ee ee eee Re AA A AN EA ee REE eRe EAA AE AEEA E EAE A A A A AEA NA eee ea ee Pe eee eet 42 Editing Processing Units in SCeEn S stsrsttrrrrrrrrsrsrsrsrrrrrrsrsrnrntnrsrtrnnnntututnnnrnrnnuutnunnnnnenenunnnnne A8 Switching Scenes and Scene Groups SRT Ce CR Ee CC ee eee CMe ee eT ee eR ae Re 50 Switching Scenes TCC a eee a a ee ECE TR Ee TR eT eee TE a eR a a WRECK a a RoR en eee a 50 Switching Scene Groups PERR EA a E a a E E E E ERC UES Ce TREN COR Ce a E 50 Editing Scenes Tee ORT a RE TT TREE a a a a a a a aa a aa a aa a ee ea Cee ee eer a eae 52 Copying a Scene Teche eee A AEEA E E A ET A ee E eT eee ee AAA AANEEN AEE 52 Clearing a Scene eB ewa a a a E Tee EMRE TER ERE E E Re E a A rE a A a a N E 52 Renaming a Scene and Adding a Description A eee E ER E A A A ERA ee E AA 53 Editing Scene Groups Aaaa E E eee Te eS ee a Ce ee eR eo E RE ee a eee Cee Rn ake eee a ES 55 Copying a Scene Group ee ee eee ee ee a ee RE ee ee gee eT ee ee a ee aCe ee eRe Rien oR ae a ee a a ae 55 Deleting a Scene Group TLL LETC Cee RECT TTT E
40. CMD EXE Command execution bits OFF ON CMD CODE Command code OFF ON jei p BUSY _ Command execution bits during execution ie ae OFF i ie ON RES CODE Response code OFF ON j j i RES DATA tt R Hee esponse data OFF CMD FLG i Command completion bits E OFF ON aaa dd DSA Data output request bits OFF ON GATE Data output completion bits ata output completion bits ON DATAO 7 X x Output data 0 to 7 utput data 0 to OFF 1 CMD CODE and CMD PARAM are set from the PLC and then CMD EXE is turned on The FZ3 receives an execution instruction 2 When the FZ3 receives the execution instruction BUSY is turned on and the command is executed 3 After the processing flow comes to the data output unit if the DSA is not turned off within the retry interval 0 to 999999 ms GATE is forcibly turned off and data output is ended 4 After measurement completion the DSA is turned on from the PLC and data output is requested 5 The FZ3 outputs data After output is complete GATE is turned on 6 The PLC confirms that GATE has turned on loads data and then the DSA is turned off 7 The FZ3 confirms that the DSA has turned off and then GATE is turned off After measurement completion the DSA is turned on from the PLC and the next data output is requested 8 to 11 2nd data output same as 4 to 7 12 When the FZ3
41. Can Be Operated from the RUN Window Tool Box Functions that can be operated from the RUN window tool box can be changed Reference Setting the RUN Window Shortcut Create Shortcut p 115 FZ3 User s Manual Arranging the RUN Window 15 uogesado Bulweys juUswWeiNses s BUIWUOLIEd v uogesado BulweysjuUswWaINses s BUIWUOLIEd Oo Useful Functions for Operation Remeasuring Saved Images Images from when measurement including test measurement was performed can be saved Remeasurement can be performed with saved images after conditions are adjusted in order to check whether the adjustment is appropriate The logging function is used for saving images Reference Setting Logging Conditions Logging Setting p 84 Images that can be remeasured include images saved in the controller and images saved in USB memory 76 3 Tap and select the file to display 1 In the Control area of the Main screen tap Test measurement 2 Tap Select image 0 Scene group 0 gt 0 Scene 0 i iii witch to RUN mode Through a Edit flow Datasave Scene switch g Measure ilest measurement t Image Input The Select Image window is displayed T A ie rs r ae ps et Setting item Description File Specify images saved in the USB memory or in the RAMDisk Logging image Specify images that are logged in the controller memory 4 The selected image is displayed at the lower
42. Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 149 SOOIAGQ JEUO XJ y m BuljeoluNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt 5 Tap Transfer String 3 TEST STRING i Local echo Contents of String are displayed on the window Check that there are no problems ON Description Send Character strings sent from external devices are displayed Receive Character strings received from external devices are displayed 6 Tap OK The Serial window closes Command Format Non procedure This section explains the format of commands used in the non procedure method When Ethernet is used For Ethernet connections delimiters are not required at the end of commands As with scene No acquisition commands when acquisition data and an OK response exist next to each other a space 0x20 is inserted between the acquisition data and the OK response and this information is grouped and sent as one packet Reference Command List Non procedure p 151 Input format example When using DISPCOND to acquire the display status lt Command format gt D I S P C O N D lt Response format gt Display state O OJK ESE ccc With Data Output when Ethernet output is set up to 128 units can be registered Note however that not all data may be received depending on the network environment being used PC performance and the soft
43. Data Output DO Selection of whether ON occurs during an OK judgement result or NG error judgement result can be performed in the communication specifications settings window Reference Setting Communication Specifications Parallel Interface p 178 184 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual Used to control the loading time of measurement results to external devices ON for the time required for external devices to securely load measurement results Set the output cycle so that the total output time is shorter than measurement interval input interval GATE of STEP signal The GATE signal is only output when the Parallel Judgement Output and Parallel Data Output are set in the measurement flow READY ON when it is possible to input STEP signal When through images are being viewed the READY signal will turn to OFF but the STEP signal is received Input signal Signal Function Inputs measurement triggers from external devices such as optic switches etc Perform STEP measurement once along with the STEP signal turning on OFF gt ON Turn the STEP signal ON for at least 0 5 ms A noise filter filter default setting value 100 us is set in STEP input Note The following can be changed with regard to the READY signal Handling of ERROR signal when STEP signal is input during measurement Reference Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement p 108 Durin
44. For color cameras 0 to 221 145 Upper limit of deviation Set Get ES TEE E 146 Lower limit of deviation Set Get A aerate aoe For monochrome cameras 0 to 127 147 Upper limit of NG Sub region Set Get O to 100 148 Lower limit of NG Sub region Set Get O to 100 149 Sub region stab Set Get 1 to 15 150 Sub region prec Set Get 1 to 3 151 Sub model number X Set Get 1 to 10 152 Sub model number Y Set Get 1 to 10 bess 0 OFF 153 Plain inspection Set Get 1 ON 202 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 154 NG Sub region 155 156 setting Set Get 0 to 99 acquisition target 155 Enabled disabled of sub region Set Get Ee peeved 1 Enabled 0 Search 156 Measurement type of sub region Set Get 1 ColorData 1 No processing item 157 Display cursor position Set Get a 158 Display cursor Sub region Pos Set Get A 159 Sub region margin Set Get 0 to 10 l l 0 Not retained 165 Disabled region retention flag Set Get 1 Retained 1000 N l N 0 to 99 Correlation value of sub region Get only O to 100 For color cameras 0 000 to 219 9705 1100 N Deviation of sub region Get only For monochrome cameras 0 000 to N 0 to 99 127 000 ECM Search No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Correlation value Get only O to 100 6 Measure X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 T Measure Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Angle 8 Get only 180 to 180 9 M
45. G 123 Edge color B 124 Difference R 125 Difference G 126 Difference B 127 Detection mode 129 Edge Level 130 Noise Level 131 Noise width 132 Edge color level 133 Upper limit of the Max width 134 Lower limit of the Max width 135 Upper limit of the Min width 136 Lower limit of the Min width 137 Upper limit of the average width 138 Lower limit of the average width 139 Upper limit of the lostwidth 140 Lower limit of the lostwidth 141 Monochrome edge detection mode 142 Edge level absolute value 143 Edge level specification method 145 Scan lines 146 Scan width 147 Display area 148 Display area direction 149 Measure type 150 Area division method dist X_MAX Y_MAX sqrt X_MAX X_MAX Y_MAX Y_MAX Color Data No Data name 0 Judge Average R component value Average G component value FZ3 User s Manual 0 After scroll 1 Before scroll 0 OFF 1 ON 0 ON 1 OFF 0 OFF 1 ON 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Oto 127 Oto 127 Oto 127 0 Color IN 1 Color OUT O to 100 O to 442 0 to 9999 O to 442 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX O to 100 O to 100 0 Light dark 1 Dark gt light O to 442 0 1 Absolute value 1 to 100 1 to 200 1 to 99 0 Forward 1 Reverse 0 Projection 1 Derivation 0 Do not fix number of area divisions 1 Fix the number of
46. Get 0 to 4 TORE 0 Not displayed 190 Grade overall quality display Set Get 1 Displayed Grade Contrast display setting 0 Not displayed i DataMatrix QR PSr 1 Displayed Grade Modulation display setting 0 Not displayed Re DataMatrix QR ee 1 Displayed Grade Fixed pattern damage display 0 Not displayed ea setting DataMatrix QR osu 1 Displayed Grade Decode display setting 0 Not displayed ee DataMatrix QR aver 1 Displayed Grade Axis non uniformity display 0 Not displayed he setting DataMatrix QR mee 1 Displayed Grade Grid non uniformity display 0 Not displayed ne setting DataMatrix QR meee 1 Displayed Grade Correction of error not used 0 Not displayed ae display setting DataMatrix QR SONHEI 1 Displayed 300 to 335 o So paTsoM cnalaciss Set Get Verification string used for classification 0 Not output 400 Character output flag Set Get 1 Output 0 RS 232C 401 Output device Set Get i Etheidei 402 Error output Set Get Error output flag 403 Error message Set Get Message output while outputting an error FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 229 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy Circle Angle No Data name Data range coy 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Center position X 0 to 99999 9999 6 Center position Y 0 to 99999 9999 7 Rotation angle 180 to 180 8 Reference X 0 to 99999 9999 9 Reference Y 0 to 99999 9999 10 Reference angle 180
47. Judgement result NG 0 OFF 120 Fill profile Set Get 1 Fill profile 2 Filling up holes 121 Inverse area presence Set Get DOFF 1 ON 0 Measurement image 122 Image kind Set Get Fe oer nae 2 Selection color image 3 Binary image l l 0 Multiple selections disabled 123 Multiple selections Set Get 1 Multiple selections enabled 0 Binary image 124 Output image Set Get 4 All color image 0 Not used 130 Usage flag 0 Set Get 1 Used 0 Not used 130 10 xN Usage flag N Set Get 1 Used N Oto7 N Oto 7 Default value 1 only for 0 Default value 0 for all others 131 10xN OR NOT setting N 0 OR N 0to7 N Oto7 Boe 1 NOT 132 10 x N Register the max color hue N N 0to7 N Oto7 Set Get 0 to 359 133 10 x N Register the min color hue N N 0to7 N 0to7 Set Get 0 to 359 Register the max color a a i saturation N Set Get 0 to 255 N 0to7 Register the min color i a i i saturation N Set Get 0 to 255 N 0to7 Register the max color n i brightness N Set Get 0 to 255 N 0 to 7 Register the min color _ Bi se brightness N Set Get 0 to 255 N 0to7 0 Black 138 10 xN Register the BG color N a N 0to7 N 0to7 Set Get 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue Characteristic application The RGB value for the coordinate specified during 5000 RGB value pixel density data Set Get set up is saved in measurement data 234 Compensate image When acquiring the data saved in measurement data is return
48. SEM eee Re ee Cee Ra eR ete eC R a Rte eee 19 Preparing Controllers Teter Eee CE ON ee RE Ce eee ee re eR ee ee ee ee eT Re eRe EE ca eee ee 19 Adjusting Cameras CeCe ee oe ee A RC OPE LE LE ee Oe CREE CCR ICRC RE eee ae CCI Re ee 19 Intelligent Camera with Lighting Function Pee Te en ee re Re Oe re ee ee ee Ie RE See See Re nen ee Ra we en 20 Input Operations TERTECEAL ET EE ERE CUCER EEA ERE CREE TEC TEE REAL RRE CERRET CAE ee ee ee eh ee eee 21 Operation of Touch Pen n a a E E E Ce ER E A ere ee ee eh i ee ee ee ee ee a eae cg eee ee eee A 21 Basic Operation of Mouse and Trackball E EAA TE RE EC CR ee ee ee ee ee eee ee A AS ey 21 Returning Controller to Factory Settings DEA a A TER ee TET ee ee Te Ce E ee en ee Re E 23 Initializing Controller System Initialization PEACE CEE Ee ie RR eT ee ae ete ee eee a Re ee or ee Ae a 23 Restarting Controller System Restart TTC EER OCCUR EET ERR Ce OR ER CR Ce br Re eR Ie ae 23 Saving Settings and Turning Power Off PURE ee ERIC eRe A E eR CE Re eR eC RI IC eee ea ok eee ee eR Ree ee 24 Turning Off LCD danaa nen a a TT a a a a a eT ee ee eR eT eT eS ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee 24 2 Setting Scenes Measurement Flow E A PETE EE EE A E ET TEETAN EET 27 What Is a Scene ss sss r ssrsrsssrnenenenennnnnnnnnnnnnunennnennnnnunununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennununnnnnnnnnnne 28 Scene Examples Perai eaaa CET Re ee a CRE CEE EE REE ERE LEER oe or ee a ee eC a Rae ee 28 What Is a Scene Group TIC TE e Cee OR TIRE CM ee RSE
49. Set Get FZ3 User s Manual 0 0000 to 99999 9999 Support measurement 239 sojqe soudJejoy jeule xXy s jqe soudJajoy eu1 Xx7 400 to 408 Actual coordinate X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 500 to 508 Actual coordinate Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set Unit Data No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Data Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 120 Unit Set Get 0 to 9999 121 Data No Set Get 0 to 99999 Get Unit Data No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Data Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 120 Unit Set Get 0 to 9999 121 Data No Set Get 0 to 99999 Set Unit Figure No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 to 24 Data 0 to 19 Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 120 Target unit Set Get 0 to 9999 121 Register figure No Set Get 0 to 999 122 Target figure No Set Get Oto 7 123 Number of setting data items Get only 0 to 20 Get Unit Figure No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Number of figures Get only Number of figures acquired 240 Support measurement FZ3 User s Manual
50. User s Manual Index Value Communicationspecifications Ethernet PLC Link 123 ep nee i ER as Communicationspecifications Parallel 178 eee PeMe ni renin gy EA ANANON 202 ConditionalBranch ExternalReference 244 A Confirmation Non procedure 149 ADJUSTwindow 60 Confirmation Parallel 180 Anglerange 265 Coordinates 269 AntiColorShading ExternalReference 235 Copyingascene 52 Arc 286 Copyingfiles 101 ASClidata 176 Copyingscenegroup 99 AutoRe meas 77 Correlation 263 Availableapplicationmemory 119 Correlationvalue 264 Availabledatamemory 119 Correlationvalue TerminologyExplanation 273 Createshortcut 115 Crosshaircursor 288 Backgroundsuppression ExternalReference 232 D Barcode ExternalReference 227 Datalogging ExternalReference 242 Binarydata 177 DataOutput ExternalReference 245 BKDLOAD 152 Datasave 24 96 BKDSAVE 153 DATASAVE 154 C DATE 155 DateVerification ExternalReference 225 Calculation ExternalReference 238 l Date timesetting 110 aa ae Es panauon 272 Defaultgateway 125 147 AOAN E REAR EIEEENGE 239 Defect ExtemalReference 222 Cameraconnection 106 l l Deletingascene 52 a a a y aleve 272 Deletingscenegroup 56 Caneel pouleve oe Detectionpoint TerminologyExplanation 272 Capnile a A DIBranch ExternalReference 244 Captu Palade SAVERES NANEN 92 DISPCOND 157 a ana in DisplaylmageFile ExternalReference 247 DisplayLastNGImage ExternalReference 247 Smal acier cous tanle 296 DNSserver 125 147 Character
51. When processing is performed normally lO KISR When processing is not performed normally EIR r 152 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual lt Parameters explanation gt System Specifies the name of the file to be read with a definite path ex USBDisk abc bkd scene group Only files that are under the following systems and have a BKD extension can be read data RAMDisk File name USBDisk portent ccc Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When LABEL1 BKD in the IMG01 folder of the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned is loaded to the controller lt Command gt BIKIDIL JOJAID USBDisk2 IMGO1 LABEL1 BKD lt Response gt OlK fr BKDSAVE The system scene group 0 data currently being used by the controller is saved to a file lt Command format gt BIKIDISIAIVIE r File name of system scene group data lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally O KIfe When processing is not performed normally IE RISr lt Parameters explanation gt Specifies the save destination and file name during saving with a definite path ex File name of USBDisk abc bkd system Save destinations include directories under the following systems Be sure to attach a BKD scene group extension to the file name data RAMDisk USBDisk FZ3 User
52. Xon Xoff Flow control is performed with software Data is sent according to the Xon Xoff codes from external devices CR Delimiter LF Adjust to the PC communication specifications gt CR tLF 1 to 120 ee l l Timeout s Set the time in which a timeout error will occur in seconds 9 Note 1 If a speed of 38400 bps or higher is selected effective communication cannot be guaranteed depending on the cable length because speeds of over 20 kbps are not defined in RS 232C standards In these cases set the communication speed at 19200 bps or lower 3 Tap OK The settings are confirmed and the Serial window closes Checking Communication Status Non procedure Check the communication status with connected external devices using the serial interface You can check whether wiring and communication settings have been performed correctly 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Communication Serial RS 232C 422 The Serial window is displayed 2 Tap Confirmation to check the I O status 3 Check or uncheck the Local echo check box String i TEST STRIMG Local echo Transfer When it is checked the transfer character string from the device is displayed in the Confirmation window 4 Any character string can be input when editing the character string to be sent through Transfer A character string with up to 12 characters can be entered TEST STRIMG Local echo FZ3 User s Manual
53. abc IFZ Save Save destinations include directories under the following systems Be sure to attach an IFZ destination extension to the file name RAMDisk USBDisk If the specified file name already exists this existing file will be overwritten Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When the image data of image data No 3 is saved with the file name LABEL1 IFZ in the IMG01 folder in the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned lt Command gt JIMIGISIAIVIE 3 USBDisk2 IMGO1 LABEL1 1FZ fr lt Response gt MEASURE or M Executing measurement Executes measurement one time FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 159 SOOINAQ JEUJO XJ y m BuljeoluNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt lt Command format gt lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally Normal Normal Fxxx series Measurement result Ep When processing is not performed normally E R R Note About Normal Fxxx series method Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 112 Measuremert result lt Parameters explanation gt When Data Output is set in the flow the measurement results are output When Data Output is not set the measurement results are not output Reference Output
54. by tapping the System menu Screen capture Screen capture About capture image files This section explains the format and file names for capture images With factory settings capture images are saved to the RAMDisk The save destination can be changed ltem Description File format The file format is BMP The file name is the date and time at which capture was performed YYYY MM DD_HH MM SS MS BMP Year 4 digits Month Date_ Hour Minute Second Millisecond Example The file name for a capture date and time of 3 10 2007 11 25 30 500 2007 03 10 11 25 30 500 BMP File name Note The following windows cannot be captured The window to select a file or a folder Confirmation message window when LCD is turned off FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 91 uogesado Bulweis juUswWeiNses s L BUIWUOLIEd v uogesado BulweysjuUswWeiNses s BUIWWOLIEd o Setting the Save Destination for Captured Images Sets the save destination for the image captured with the screen capture function 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Screen capture Screen capture setting The Screen Capture Setting window is displayed 2 Specify the save destination for captured images Save folderi SUSEDisk 3 Tap OK The settings are determined and the Screen Capture Setting window closes 92 Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual saving Loading Data FZ3 User s Ma
55. codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Acquiring Unit Data Acquires the specified processing unit data In Set Unit Data Get Unit Data external reference table No 139 verification string of Character Inspection cannot be used 136 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Command PLC to Controller Command area top channel 2 3 4 5 6 7 Command code 1000 0040 Bit 15 12 11 8 7 4 Response Controller to PLC Description Set command codes Specify the unit No Specify the data No Response Bit area Description top channel ore 2 0001 Command code 3 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 Value multiplied by 1000 Acquiring Date and Time Acquires the date and time from the internal calendar timer in the controller Command PLC to Controller Command area top channel 2 3 Command P 15 12 74 3 0 Description 0010 0000 0000 0000 Set command 0000 0000 0100 0000 codes 2000 0040 Bit Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area Description top channel 19 12 oe Command code 3 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 Response code
56. completes execution CMD CODE RES CODE and RES DATA are set and then CMD FLG is turned on 13 The PLC confirms that CMD FLG has turned on and then CMD EXE is turned off 14 The FZ3 confirms that CMD EXE has turned off and then CMD FLG and BUSY are turned off Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 143 SOOINAQ JEUO XJ y m BuljealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ JEUJO XJ y m BuljealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt Ladder Program Example PLC Link This section shows a PLC ladder program example P First Cycle MOV Command area 2 MOV Command area 3 100 00 100 01 Command Command completion bits execution bits during execution MOV MOV 101 00 Data output completion bits 101 00 Data output completion bits Command area 1 Mov w Set the measurement command lower word Set the measurement command upper word 1 is written to command area 0 and the command execution bit turns on If the data output completion bits are off the data output request bits turn on If the data output completion bits are on the data output request bits turn off 144 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link Measurement Output FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure This section describes how to set required communication specifi
57. due amounts Interest Omron at its option may charge Buyer 1 1 2 interest per month or the maximum legal rate whichever is less on any balance not paid within the stated terms Orders Omron will accept no order less than 200 net billing Governmental Approvals Buyer shall be responsible for and shall bear all costs involved in obtaining any government approvals required for the impor tation or sale of the Products Taxes All taxes duties and other governmental charges other than general real property and income taxes including any interest or penalties thereon imposed directly or indirectly on Omron or required to be collected directly or indirectly by Omron for the manufacture production sale delivery importa tion consumption or use of the Products sold hereunder including customs duties and sales excise use turnover and license taxes shall be charged to and remitted by Buyer to Omron Financial If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory to Omron Omron reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory security or payment in advance If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise comply with these Terms or any related agreement Omron may without liabil ity and in addition to other remedies cancel any unshipped portion of Prod ucts sold hereunder and stop any Products in transit until Buyer pays all amounts including amounts payable hereunder whether or not then due which are owing
58. eee ee eee eee 68 Changing Display Contents SECC PCCP SCOP SCOP SCO C OCC e Sco e eee eee eee eee rere rece eee reece eee eee ee eee ee ee eee ee ee ee 69 Enlarging Measurement Images Zoom Images nu unuuuuunnununnunnunnuuuuununuuununnunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 13 Displaying Flow and Detailed Results sctttttt ttt ttt t tres etree sete ee eee eee e eee ee eee ee eee nene ee eaeeeeeaeaeenaaes 13 Switching the RUN Window to Fast View Mode Select RUN Mode vrrrrsrrtrrrrrrrtrrreeeteterere reese 14 Changing Display Contents on the RUN Window Measurement Information Display Area 19 Changing Functions That Can Be Operated from the RUN Window Tool Box ssrsrsrrrrrrtrererereee 19 Useful Functions for Operation SECC PCCTCCCOSCOSOCoe CoCo Sco e eee T eee eee eee eee ee eee e eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee ee 76 Remeasuring Saved Images nu ununuunnununuuunnunuunuunnnnunnuunnnuunnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnNnnNnnnnnnn 76 Improving Adjustment Efficiency n nnunnuununnunnnnNNNNENNENSNNNENSENSHNEHNSENENNHHNSHNENSEHNEHNENEHNNENNENENNNN TT Changing Judgement Conditions without Stopping Measurement sssssssssssrssssrrsersrrsererenernenes 79 Changing Regions as a Batch Shift area nu unnnuuunnununnuunnnuuunuunnuuunnuununnunnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 81 Monitoring Measurement Value Trends rsssssss s s ssssssenununnununununuununununnununununnununnnnnnunnnnn 82 Logging Measurement Values and Measurement Images nu nnuununnunnunnuununnunnunnunnunnunnnnnnnnnnn 82 Analyzin
59. if there is no free capacity in the controller memory New logging is not performed until free capacity Measurement becomes available in the controller memory The measurement tact time is maintained but some measurement may not be logged 5 Set the data logging conditions The data format is set with the processing item Data Logging ala logging None Only NG Call Dest inat ion Folder nieme z 86 Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual Set value Setting item Factory Description default None Measurement data is not saved Measurement data is saved when an NG error occurs in a unit before Data Only NG Data Logging If an NG error occurs after the Data Logging Logging processing unit data logging is not performed All All measurement data is saved 6 Set the logging data save destination ala loge ite Hone C Only NG Call est ination Folder name WRANDiskY ee Set value Setting item Factor CEU Description RAMDisk The data is saved in the specified destination folder RAMDisk or Folder name USBDisk Set the file name with the processing unit Data USBDisk ie aingl Note About loading data to a PC Factory settings are set so that logging data is saved in the controller RAMDisk When logging data is loaded to a PC set USBDisk as the save destination Logging data is first saved to the controller RA
60. image Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Position Compensation p 231 Trapezoidal Correction p 231 Filtering p 232 Background Suppression p 232 Color Gray Filter p 233 Extract Color Filter p 234 Anti Color Shading p 235 Stripes Removal Filter p 235 Halation Cut p 236 Panorama p 236 Polar Transformation p 237 Support measurement i Reference Calculation p 238 i Reference Line Regression p 238 i Reference Circle Regression p 239 i Reference Calibration p 239 i Reference Set Unit Data p 240 196 FZ3 User s Manual FZ3 User s Manual i Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference 05 Reference Reference Branch Reference Reference Output result Reference Reference Reference Display result Reference Reference Reference Get Unit Data p 240 Set Unit Figure p 240 Get Unit Figure p 240 Trend Monitor p 241 Image Logging p 242 Data Logging p 242 Elapsed Time p 243 Wait p 243 Conditional Branch p 244 DI Branch p 244 Data Output p 245 Parallel Data Output p 245 Parallel Judgement Output p 246 Result Display p 247 Display Image File p 247 Display Last NG Image p 247 197 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy 0 No j
61. in the absence of the following data The range of values that can be output is as follows 999999999 9999 lt Measurement value lt 999999999 9999 When measurement value is lt 999999999 9999 999999999 9999 is output When measurement value is gt 999999999 9999 999999999 9999 is output When JG Judgement is set the next value is output OK 1 NG 1 Note Even if measurement is complete data output will not stop until all of the data is output Please note data output will not be interrupted When outputting 176 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Binary Data Set the output format as Binary in Setting of the Data Output processing item Output format Measured value X 1000 of Data 0 Messured value 1000 of Oats 1 Measured value 1000 of Lata l 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 Bytes The measurement data is multiplied by 1000 and output is continuous with 4 bytes per each data item Negative numbers are output in 2 s complement format For a definition of 2 s complement see Reference Terminology Explanations p 271 Example When Data 0 is 256 324 and data 1 is 1 000 00 03 ES 444 FF FF FE 418 Po Data 0 256324 Data 1 1000 256 324 x 1000 1 000 x 1000 Note Unlike ASCII output binary output has no separators between data such as field separators or record separators etc Reference Processing Item List Manual
62. in the numerical sequence of the processing unit numbers 28 What Is a Scene FZ3 User s Manual Tiie mna earch Processing unit Ho AA a osion CGompensyt igi Example Normal measurement Display Image Capture Image from camera a ami 5 eee ail 4 AFra Matching Carry out position compensation a l 4 Pargle hiena Oi nam Check the defect Output measurement results to external devices Exit Note MO 4 JUsLUaINSes SoUsDS Buas The processing item Camera Image Input is set in processing unit 0 beforehand FZ3 User s Manual What Is a Scene 29 Example When adding Position Compensation for two measurement objects in the same field of view MO 4 JUsLUaINSes SoUsDS Bues Display Image Capture Image from camera ag OiCamera mape Input 1 Saath Ide nt ify the shape eee 2Position Compensation i z fe i aFine matching Carry out Position Compensation gt O P ail relative to measurement object 1 J c minai mee k i SPosition Compensation Check for defects relative to 4 A measurement objects 1 i G Fine Matching gg 7 Parallel Judgement Output Me Garry out Position Compensation relative to measurement object 2 heck for defects relative to measurement object 2 Out put the judged result to an external device 30 What Is a Scene FZ3 User s Manual Example When judging type from the image and d
63. is displayed Date ie Pezi im Meacur ere i de Fabi leg Severe Search ECM Saach Ec Grai Search had gain Loge Poster Eike P gh Stan Edge Foii Stan bia leh Calor Gita Gray a Ae akas hing Lite Doge Terbi gt OP BP EP t bi mE h e ee N Preca Deler 2 Select the processing item in which to change the region Only image setting processing items included in Input image and Compensate image are displayed mage select 0 Camera Image Input 3 Select the registration region to change Figures List dUit Figures ooo E l search Region oO 2 search Rezion 4 Tap Move and input the value or tap the arrows to move the image Images can also be directly dragged and moved FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 81 uogesado Bulweys juUswWeiNses s BUIWUOLIEd v uogesado BulweysjuUswWeiNses s BUIWOLIEd Oo 5 Tap OK The change is registered Monitoring Measurement Value Trends By monitoring the trend in measurement values the occurrence of defects can be prevented in advance and this information can also be helpful in NG error occurrence cause analysis Use the processing item Trend Monitor to monitor the measurement values Reference Processing ltem List Manual Trend Monitor p 363 Judgment upper linni Mts Limits of warning f Waring upper limit Limits of warning Poe ee D lower lirnit mi Judgment lower l
64. lect file Select folder FRAUD sky OCO O Select file name E j Delete original data after save FZ3 User s Manual Copying Moving Files 101 eyeq Bulpeo7 bulaes gt e1eq Bulpeo7 bulaes gt 102 5 Tap OK Pasi inai lon Folder name ARD iski The window showing transfer status is displayed and the data is sent to the save destination Copying Moving Files FZ3 User s Manual Loads the settings data saved in an external device to the controller The scene name and scene group name that have been loaded are displayed in the measurement information display area Note If Load from file is performed for system scene group O data the data being loaded will also be saved to the controller flash memory at the same time During loading do not restart turn off power or remove the USB memory Data will be corrupted and the system will not work properly at the next startup 1 Perform either of the following Plug the USB memory device which has the load data stored in it into the controller Send setting data to the controller s RAM Disk via FTP 2 On the Main screen tap the Data menu Load from file The Load from File window is displayed 3 Select the file to load eyeq Bulpeo7 bulaes gt The window showing the transfer status is displayed and the data is transferred FZ3 User s Manual Loading Settings Data to Controller 103 e1eq Bulpeo7 bulnes gt 104 Load
65. left of the FileExplorer screen When there are multiple camera images in a file as for a logging image when multiple cameras are connected use the lt lt and gt gt buttons to switch images laate count 2 Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual 5 Tap OK The path and file name of the image are displayed under Select image 6 Check Measure using selected img Re meas 1 Scene group D E Edit Naw F Data save Scene switch 0 Scene l i Signal output OFF Freeze ja Measure Test measurement 2 C wip Continuows meas 2 Calibrationt lt Select image gt t DocumentsOMRON FORAMDISK ic apn Measure using selected imgire meas Ff AU Rennes Monitoring Judgement E z Tap Measure in the toolbar on the Main screen J 0 Scene group 0 E Edit flow f ta Save Ts Scene switch ig O Signal output OFF Freeze Measurement of the selected image is performed Note About Auto Re meas Displayed images can be automatically remeasured by placing a check in Auto Re meas E cc When remeasuring an image with the controller it is necessary to have a camera connected that is appropriate to the image size For example if the image file for remeasurement contains 2 megapixel images and a 0 3 megapixel camera is connected to the controller or if a camera is not connected measurement will not be performed correctly due to a
66. memory deficiency Perform remeasurement after connecting a camera appropriate to the image size Improving Adjustment Efficiency Convenient when measuring a large amount of image samples and classification or adjustment is performed with each judgement Files in which NG error files and OK files are mixed can be continuously remeasured automatically with the system stopping at images with a specified condition OK NG and these files being moved 1 In the Control area of the Main screen tap Test measurement 2 Place a check next to Monitoring Judgement and set the judgement conditions for identification AIO ReEMeas i Monitoring Judgement he If the specified judgement condition is achieved when continuous measurement is performed measurement stops and the following message is displayed FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 77 uogesado Bulweis juUswWeiNses s L Burwood v uogesado BulweysjuUswWaINses s BUIWUOLIEd Oo 78 If OK is selected 2008 10 24_10 43 37 857 if The judgement result became 0K maze file move to If NG is selected 2003 10 24_10 43 20 165 ifz The judgment retull became NE bdiuel sett t i rg Hove Image File Skip Inace file move to USED sk kad 3 Select the processing for the measured image For Adjust setting Tap the Adjust setting button For Move Image file Specify the save destination and tap OK
67. not be saved 1 On the Main screen the ADJUST window tap Data save in the toolbar to save the set data a Seatbelt lo ALUN mek 2 Exit after powering off the controller Note Data to be saved Scene data and system data are saved in the controller Logging images and data saved in the RAMDisk are not saved Perform any of the following procedures to keep this data Copy data saved in the RAMDisk to the USB memory Reference Copying Moving Files p 101 Change the save destination for logging data to the USB memory Reference Saving Logging Images to RAMDisk USB Device p 100 When using the scene group function The scene data set in scene group 0 is saved in the controller The scene data from scene groups 1 to 31 is saved to the USB memory and overwrites previous saved data Turning Off LCD This function is specific to FZ3 300 700 series LCD monitor integrated controllers Turn off the LCD monitor only without turning off the controller 1 Open the measurement manager bar at the bottom right of the Main screen and tap LCD Off Fimage view setting mage layout 1 image Activa image iaga mode Pos it iong Sub laage A confirmation message is displayed 2 Tap OK LOD off In case of an integrated controller shut off the porer of Click the bottoms of screen if porering on again UK 24 Saving Settings and Turning Power Off FZ3 User s Manual Power
68. of images When measurement images contain noise The filtering items Dilate and Erosion are both effective Dilate When there is dark noise in an image bright areas are enlarged to eliminate dark noise FZ3 User s Manual Key Points for Adjustment 65 uogesado Bulweys juUswWeiNses s L BUIWOLIEd v uogesado BulweysjuUswWeINses s BUIWOLIEd Oo Erosion When there is bright noise in an image bright areas are contracted to eliminate bright noise Erosion Before filtering After filtering When contrast of measurement images is low defect inspection is unstable The filtering items Extract vertical edges Extract horizontal edges and Extract edges are effective Extract vertical edges This extracts the vertical edges of an image Extract vertical edges Before filtering After filtering Extract horizontal edges This extracts the horizontal edges of an image Extract edges This extracts the all edges of an image When unidentifiable shapes are present The filtering item Extract edges is effective Extract edges This is used to make the profile clearer and the shape more identifiable Extract edges Before filtering After filtering 66 Key Points for Adjustment FZ3 User s Manual Shortening Processing Time Find out which processing units are taking the most time and adjust the parameters of these processing items taking time 1 Insert the processing item Elapsed Time a
69. p 178 i Reference Externally Outputting Data through FTP p 192 121 SOOINGQ JEUO XJ y m BuljealuNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt About Connecting with External Devices With the FZ3 serial interfaces and parallel interfaces can be used to communicate with external devices With serial interfaces RS 232C RS 422 and Ethernet can be selected as communication ports Non procedure and PLC Link can be used with either communication port Additionally data transfer through FTP is also possible with Ethernet Protocols usable with serial interface The protocols that can be used with a serial interface are listed below Controls the FZ3 through commands from a PC or specialized device pommel Control from the PLC is also possible The FZ3 is controlled and measurement results are acquired only through data memory operations in the PLC The FZ3 reads commands in the data memory DM and channel I O CIO in the PLC executes PLC Link measurement and writes execution results to the data memory This protocol is appropriate when the PLC is used as an external device The PLC supported by the FZ3 PLC Link protocol is the SYSMAC CS CJ CP One series PLC from OMRON With a parallel interface control such as measurement control scene group switching scene switching clearing areas clearing measurement values clearing parallel terminals is possible SOOINAQ JEUO XJ y m Bugesiunwwon pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt 122 About Connecti
70. pmpa a fz LEE FIRE WENA mi naar M NE FP 2 55 Fe Lik FIAR Ta Let 2008 FP Le el Bet te SS LES PFZ Rib ijik FST SG 00 ta Fe LED OPT Pile TESE F 3 In the same way as with normal file operations logging images can be output from the controller 194 Externally Outputting Data through FTP FZ3 User s Manual External Reference Tables FZ3 User s Manual Input image Reference Measurement Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference WS Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference i Reference Reference Measurement Image Switching p 198 Search p 199 Flexible Search p 200 Sensitive Search p 201 ECM Search p 203 EC Circle Search p 204 Shape Search p 206 Classification p 208 Edge Position p 209 Edge Pitch p 210 Scan Edge Position p 211 Scan Edge Width p 212 Color Data p 213 Gravity and Area p 214 Labeling p 216 Label Data p 217 Labeling p 218 Defect p 222 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Precise Defect p 222 Fine Matching p 223 Character Inspection p 224 Date Verification p 225 Model Dictionary p 226 Barcode p 227 2D Code p 228 Circle Angle p 230 Compensate
71. presence Set Get oe FZ3 User s Manual Compensate image 235 sojqe soudJejoy jeule xXy s jqe soudJajoy eu1 x7 300 301 302 303 350 Vertical and horizontal width of square filter Vertical width of vertical filter Horizontal width of horizontal filter Defect size Contrast Halation Cut 3 to 63 Pattern kind Lattice 3 to 63 Pattern kind Lattice 3 to 63 Pattern kind Lattice 3 to 63 3 Set Get Pattern kind Normal vertical stripes horizontal stripes Set Get Contrast 1 to 63 Set Get Set Get Set Get No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF 120 RB ratio adjustment Set Get 100 to 100 121 Gain Set Get 0 0001 to 9 9999 122 Filtered image Set Get E RAMAIS Prine ve let 1 Filtered image 200 Transfer source image number _ Set Get 0 to 9 201 Image number after transfer Set Get 0to9 Panoramat No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 0 Camera 0 1 100 Select camera Set Get 1 Camera0 1 2 2 Camera0 1 2 3 0 1 x 4 placement 101 Arrangement Set Get 1 2x 2 placement 102 Select Image Set Get Oto3 103 Amount of parallel movement Set Get For 0 3 megapixel cameras 640 to 640 X For 2 megapixel cameras 1600 to
72. s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 153 SOOIAGQ JEUO XJ y m BuljeoluNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt E ccc Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When the currently used system scene group 0 data is saved as LABEL1 BKD in the IMG01 folder in the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned lt Command gt BIKIDISIAIVIE USBDisk2 IMG01 LABEL1 BKD r lt Response gt OJK CLRMEAS Clears all of the measurement values of the current scene lt Command format gt lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally O K er When processing is not performed normally IEIRIfe lt Window display status after clearing gt Judgement result Unmeasured 0 Value 0 Character string Null character DATASAVE Saves system data and scene group data to the internal flash memory in the controller lt Command format gt DJAITIAISIAIV IE r 154 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally OJK r When processing is not performed normally Note lf DATASAVE command is executed when using scene groups 1 to 31 system data is saved on the controller s flash memory and scene group data is saved to th
73. scene group No currently used scene group No is output as a response 0 to 31 FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 163 SOOIAGQ JEUJO XJ y m BuljealuNWWO pue BulJOSUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt Example When scene group 0 is being used lt Command gt lt Response gt LO or OKIE Switch the scene group No Switches the scene group No to be used lt Command format gt SICIN GIRJO UIP C Scene group No max 2 digits lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally When processing is not performed normally E R amp e lt Parameters explanation gt Scene group No Specifies the scene group No after switching 0 to 31 Example When switching to scene group 2 lt Command gt lt Response gt OJKISr 164 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual mportant During parallel continuous measurement and when the STEP signal is input continuously do not perform switching of the scene group When this is performed set Unchecked in Save scene group on switch scene in either of the settings items below Switch Scene Group window Reference Switching Scene Groups p 50 Measure setting in the Measure menu Reference Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement p 108 SCNLOAD Re
74. set as references also automatically increase by one If a button other than Paste is tapped after pasting a processing unit continued pasting of the processing cannot be performed If a processing unit is deleted the numbers for the subsequent processing units decrease by one With processing items related to results output or branch control the numbers for processing units set as references also automatically decrease by one To make a specific processing unit not display in a flow on the ADJUST window or RUN window insert a single byte at the beginning of the processing unit name Ref other Sores flor Wk FZ3 User s Manual Editing Processing Units in Scenes 49 MO 4 u wanseapw SoUBDS Huas MO 4 uawanseapw SoUdDS Huas Switching Scenes and Scene Groups Set up can be changed by changing the scene With factory settings the default display is scene 0 when the power is switched on In addition multiple scenes can be created Scene 1 to 31 Also when combined with the scene group function up to 1024 scenes can be set Instructions for switching scene groups and scenes can also be performed from external devices Reference Methods for Connecting and Communicating with External Devices p 121 Switching Scenes 1 Tap Scene switch in the toolbar on the Main screen Signal output OFF The Switch Scene window is displayed Note The same operation is available by tapping Scene menu
75. setting is low rotation Use fast rotation when using the system in a high temperature environment between 45 and 50 C 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Fan control setting The Fan Control Setting window is displayed 2 Select a fan setting H Lor rolation Aablent Temperature 445 C C High retalian Aebient Teaperalure B 50T Halip ii Cancel FZ3 User s Manual Setting the System Operation Environment 111 JUBWUOJIAUQ wazs S y BulbuUeUD o JUBWUOJIAUQ W9a1SAS y BulbuUeUD oO Set value Factory default Description Select a fan rotation speed Low rotation Ambient temperature 0 to 45 C High rotation Ambient temperature 0 to 50 C 3 Tap OK mportnt For the FZ3 3 OO FZ3 H3 LIU series the fan control setting is fixed at low rotation The setting cannot be changed to fast rotation Fast rotation can be selected on the screen but the setting will not change Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting The status for when power is turned on is set here Inspection can be set to start immediately after the power is turned on by setting the scene No of the scene in which measurement contents are set In addition settings can be done so that the Camera Setting window is not displayed at start up 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Startup setting The Startup Setting window is displayed 2 Change the se
76. than the Main screen the Edit Flow window etc displayed Are there any setting windows open A setting window is defined as a window that opens separately such as the Edit Flow window and the Scene Maintenance window Signals cannot be output to external devices Is the trigger signal input Are the cables connected correctly Is the signal cable disconnected You can check the communication status in the Confirmation window Reference Checking Communication Status Parallel Interface p 180 260 FAQ FZ3 User s Manual Is test measurement being performed Data cannot be output to external devices during test measurement About Serial Interface RS 232C 422 Connection No communication available Are the cables connected correctly Are the communication specifications of the external devices compatible with the controller You can check the communication status in the Confirmation window Reference Checking Communication Status Non procedure p 149 The controller works fine initially but there is not response after a while Is the buffer memory of the PC full Please verify if data can be received correctly based on current settings Data cannot be saved Are the communication specifications of the external devices compatible with the controller Is Flow control in communication specifications set to None To save data set Flow control to None Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS
77. to 180 101 Output coordinates EE 102 Calibration 0 OFF 1 ON soa 0 Search 120 Mode Set Get 1 Edge 2 Defect 121 Skipping angle 0 1 to 10 122 Edge pitch 1 to 99 sojqe soudJajoy eu1 x7 230 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual Compensate image Position Compensation No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Scroll X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 6 Scroll Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 Scroll Get only 999 9999 to 999 9999 8 Position X Get only 0 to 99999 9999 9 Position Y Get only 0 to 99999 9999 10 Measurement 0 Get only 360 to 360 11 Reference X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 12 Reference Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 13 Reference 0 Get only 999 9999 to 999 9999 120 Interpolation Set Get mone 1 Bilinear 0 1 unit scroll 1 2 unit scroll 121 Method Set Get 2 Expression 3 Reset scroll 122 Scroll target Set Get pama E 1 Prev unit image l 0 OFF 123 With rotation Set Get 1 ON Trapezoidal Correction No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 120 Interpolation mode Set Get a one l l 1 Linear interpolation 121 Method aa 1 Expression l 0 Camera image 122 Input image 1 Prev image 123 Reference position setting Set Get 0 Figure method 1 Expression 124 Measureme
78. to be sent Output state RUN F ERR OFF BUSY ORO OFF GATE m READTO OFF ORI UFF GATE1 OFF READY I OFF Do 7 0 1 2 3 q 5 EA AR om or or OFF Por OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Por H a 10 11 le 13 4 15 When switching between ON OFF is performed the changed contents are displayed on the monitors of external devices Check for any problems 4 Tap OK The Parallel window closes I O Format Parallel Interface Input Format When the Main screen is displayed the following commands can be input STEP signal Measurement is performed once when STEP signal turns on DSA signal When Output control is set to Handshaking this is a signal to provide notification that the external device is ready to receive data Reference Setting Communication Specifications Parallel Interface p 178 DI signal Commands can be input in the following format Set 0 OFF or 1 ON for each DI signal Confirm commands and information and turn DI7 run ON with an interval of at least 1 ms Input format DI to DIO DIF Dle DIS Di4 Dis Dle BM DIO Aun Command Command information FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 181 SOOINAQ JEUO XJ y m BuljealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt Input format DI7 to DIO Item Description Execute Command Command information Input example DI7 DI
79. to it by Buyer Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts Cancellation Etc Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation unless Buyer indemnifies Omron against all related costs or expenses Force Majeure Omron shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery resulting from causes beyond its control including earthquakes fires floods strikes or other labor disputes shortage of labor or materials accidents to machinery acts of sabotage riots delay in or lack of transportation or the requirements of any government authority Shipping Delivery Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Omron a Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Omron Omron will not drop ship except in break down situations b Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall constitute delivery to Buyer c All sales and shipments of Products shall be FOB shipping point unless oth erwise stated in writing by Omron at which point title and risk of loss shall pass from Omron to Buyer provided that Omron shall retain a security inter est in the Products until the full purchase price is paid d Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only and e Omron will package Products as it deems proper for protection against nor mal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions Claims Any claim by Buyer against Omron for shortage or damage to the Products occurring
80. to the LCD monitor is turned off Turning LCD On Again This function is specific to FZ3 300 700 series LCD monitor integrated controllers Tap the lower part of the monitor screen The LCD will then be switched on FZ3 User s Manual Saving Settings and Turning Power Off 25 uoneJedO aojag uonejedO aojag 26 Saving Settings and Turning Power Off FZ3 User s Manual Setting Scenes Measurement Flow FZ3 User s Manual A measurement flow consisting of a series of combined processing items is called a scene This chapter explains how to create and edit scenes Reference Reference Reference i Reference iS Reference Reference Reference i Reference What Is a Scene p 28 What Is a Scene Group p 32 Creating a Scene p 33 Processing Item Selection Guidelines p 35 Editing Processing Units in Scenes p 48 Switching Scenes and Scene Groups p 50 Editing Scenes p 52 Editing Scene Groups p 55 27 MO 4 u wanseapw SoUBDS Huas MO 4 JUsLUaJNSes SoUdDS Huas What Is a Scene Processing items for use with various measurement objects and measurement objectives are provided in this product By combining and executing these processing items measurement adapted to the purpose can be implemented A combination of processing items is called a scene and scenes can be easily created by combining processing items that are suited to the measurement purpose from the li
81. unit number 0 to 9999 125 Term year 0 to 99 126 Term month 0 to 99 127 Term day 0 to 999 saos 0 Not update 128 Auto Update Set Get 1 First measurement after startup 2 Always update 129 Zero suppress Set Get i 1 Space 0 Month Da 130 Calculation order Set Get 1 Day gt ised FZ3 User s Manual Measurement sojqe soudJajoy eu1 x7 sojqe soudJejJoy eu1 x7 131 Month end adjust 0 Last day of now Set Get 1 First day of next 2 Gap day of next 132 Back margin Set Get 0 to 99 133 Ahead margin Set Get 0 to 99 0 Not used 134 Code year 1 flag Set Get 1 Used 0 Not used 135 Code year 2 flag Set Get i Seed 136 Code month 1 flag Set Get TOOLEN 1 Used 137 Code month 2 flag Set Get edge 1 Used 0 Not used 138 Code day 1 flag Set Get ie Used 0 Not used 139 Code day 2 flag Set Get sused 0 Not used 140 Code hour 1 flag Set Get 1 Used 0 Not used 141 Code hour 2 flag Set Get 4 Used 142 Code minute 1 flag Set Get ne eee 1 Used 143 Code minute 2 flag Set Get PA 1 Used 160 Operation code number Set Get 0 to 99 5000 Execute date update Set Get a ou oe 1 Failure Model Dictionary No 121 122 123 125 126 127 226 Data name Judge With rotation Upper limit of the rotation angle Lower limit of the rotation angle Smart mode Stab Prec Measurement Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured Get only 1 Judgement re
82. x am Xx ar a emeni area ee eee gttess 20 Edge level YY n 20o Edge level When performing measurement using color difference value Edge level is set using color difference absolute value Measurement region ofp Noise Edge level absolute value Noise Level This level judges whether an edge is present or not The maximum value and minimum value for color difference in the edge detection area are determined and if the difference is less than the noise level it is judged that there is no edge When detection is affected by noise increase this value within area Maximum value minimum value of color difference lt noise level edge does not exist measurement result is fail Maximum value minimum value of color difference gt Noise level edge exists targeted for measurement Example When noise level is set to 30 Measurement region _ _ Max color difference 60 60 15 gt 30 Judged as with Min color difference 15 edge and measure Measurement region pa tes 4 Perey Max color difference 35 35 15 lt 30 Min color difference 15 Judged as with edge and measure FZ3 User s Manual Measurement Mechanism 267 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy Noise Width Set the width for judging noise When no color is specified If another edge is detected within the width range starting from the point where an edge was first detected the newly detec
83. 0 Scene O 7 Signal output OFF re I Edit flow Fl Datasave Scene switch fa Measure Teast measurement Gutput Continuons meas Camera mage nput Measurement is performed Note With continuous measurement the Measure button changes to the Stop meas button during the measurement To stop continuous measurement tap Stop meas 4 Check measurement results 5 If necessary adjust the setting values for each processing unit again Moving to the property window can be done directly by tapping the button of any processing unit set in the flow FZ3 User s Manual Performing Test Measurement 63 uogesado Bulweys juUswWeiNses s BUIWOLIEd v uogesado BulweysjuUswWaINses s BUIWUOLIEd Oo g ee Test images can be saved This function is called the logging function After setting conditions these test images can be used in performing test measurement again Reference Logging Measurement Values and Measurement Images p 82 portent ccc The measurement interval and display update interval will vary for continuous measurement with test measurement settings and continuous measurement with serial commands parallel commands Evaluate the measurement interval and display update interval by watching actual operation 64 Performing Test Measurement FZ3 User s Manual Key Points for Adjustment This section describes key points for adjustment when aiming to improve measure
84. 0 to 32 2 NG Cause 0x0000 to 0x0007 0 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement 1 OFF oe 1 OFF 120 to 123 Dictionary unit number Set Get 0 to 9999 0 OCR 124 Inspection mode 1 OCR Count 2 OCV 0 125 Direction is 2 3 T 0 OFF 126 Character output 1 ON 127 Character output destination Haag iia 1 Ethernet 224 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 132 ia candidate point level usage Set Get a 1 Used 1000 to 1031 Unit No Get only 1 None 0 to 9999 1032 to 1063 Detected index Get only 0 to 35 1064 to 1095 Detected model No Get only 0 to 4 1096 to 1127 Chara code Get only 0 to OxFFFF UTF 16 encoded 1128 to 1159 Detected NG Cause Get only Oto7 1160 to 1191 Correlation value Get only O to 100 1192 to 1223 Detected coordinate X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 1224 to 1255 Detected coordinate Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 1256 to 1287 Detected angle Get only 180 to 180 1288 to 1319 Reference X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 1320 to 1351 Reference Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 1352 to 1383 Reference angle Get only 180 to 180 Date Verification No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Verification string Character string with 32 characters or less 2 Read string Character string with 32 characters or less 103 Reflect to overall judgement n an 1 OFF 120 OCR
85. 05 Systeminformation 119 Systeminitialization 23 Systemrestart 23 T Testmeasurement 63 Text 290 Time 290 Timingchart 183 Timingchart PLCLink 140 Touchpen 21 Trackball 21 TrapezoidalCorrection ExternalReference 231 TrendMonitor 82 TrendMonitor ExternalReference 241 FZ3 User s Manual 301 Terms and Conditions of Sale OMRON 5 7 10 11 12 13 Offer Acceptance These terms and conditions these Terms are deemed part of all quotes agreements purchase orders acknowledgments price lists catalogs manuals brochures and other documents whether electronic or in writing relating to the sale of products or services collectively the Products by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies Omron Omron objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyers purchase order or other documents which are inconsistent with or in addition to these Terms Prices Payment Terms All prices stated are current subject to change with out notice by Omron Omron reserves the right to increase or decrease prices on any unshipped portions of outstanding orders Payments for Products are due net 30 days unless otherwise stated in the invoice Discounts Cash discounts if any will apply only on the net amount of invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges taxes and duties and will be allowed only if i the invoice is paid according to Omron s payment terms and ii Buyer has no past
86. 1 Judgement result NG 5 Edge position X 0 to 99999 9999 6 Edge position Y 0 to 99999 9999 7 Reference X 0 to 99999 9999 8 Reference Y 0 to 99999 9999 101 Output Coordinates Set Get A es 102 Calibration Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF 120 Edge color specification Set Get A 121 Edge color R 0 to 255 122 Edge color G 0 to 255 123 Edge color B 0 to 255 124 Difference R 0 to 127 125 Difference G Oto 127 126 Difference B 0 to 127 l 0 Color IN 127 Edge detection mode 1 Color OUT 129 Reference X 0 to 99999 9999 130 Reference Y 0 to 99999 9999 131 Edge No 0 to 99 132 Edge Level 0 to 100 133 Noise Level 0 to 442 134 Noise width 0 to 9999 135 Edge color level O to 442 136 Upper limit of the edge position X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 137 Lower limit of the edge position X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 138 Upper limit of the edge position Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 139 Lower limit of the edge position Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 140 Monochrome edge detection mode Set Get ae K a 141 Edge level absolute value Set Get 0 to 442 142 Edge level specification method Set Get 0 1 Absolute value 143 Clockwise Counterclockwise Set Get 0 Clockwise 1 Counterclockwise 144 Measure type Set Get 0 Projection 1 Derivation FZ3 User s Manual Measurement s jqe soudJajJoy eu1 x7 Edge Pitch sojqe soudJejJoy eu1 x7 No Data name Data range cay 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Ju
87. 144 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure sstrtrttttrtrttettt eter treet 145 Communication Processing Flow Non procedure PCE P PCC rece eee reece eer reer reer ree ee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee 145 Setting Communication Specifications Ethernet Non procedure s 1 tststrrrtttrtrttetetet steer eee 145 Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 Non procedure s ststrtrtttrttetet ete 147 Checking Communication Status Non procedure Cer CeCe eee e cere rere creer rere rere eee ee eee eee eee ee eee 149 Command Format Non procedure n CeCe eee cere rere reer eer rere reer rece eee ere ee ee eee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee 150 Command List Non procedure SECC PPCCTOCCoP COPS COSCCCOSCOCC CeCe oC e eee eee Tee eee eee e eee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee 151 Output Format Non procedure SECT EPCCT SCOOP COPCCOSCCCOCCO CSCC e eco eee Tere eee rece reer eee ee eee eee ee eee eee ee ee 176 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication SPCC Pee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee 178 Setting Communication Specifications Parallel Interface rrstrrrtttreee terete tet tet et ete t ee eees 178 Checking Communication Status Parallel Interface SPCC P CCP eCCe PCC e eee ee eee eee eee eee ee eee ee ee ee eee 180 I O Format Parallel Interface u nsunuuununnunNNNNNNSENNNNSENSNNNENSENEENSHNSHNENNSENEHNEHNSHNENSEHNSHNENNENNENNN 181 Timing Chart n unnunnuununnuNNNNSNNNENNENSENEENSENSNNEHNSENEHN
88. 1600 104 Amount of parallel movement Set Get For 0 3 megapixel cameras 480 to 480 Y For 2 megapixel cameras 1200 to 1200 TEN 0 Not drawn 107 Flag for drawing image frame Set Get DNN 108 Flag for drawing characteristic Set Get 0 Not drawn points 1 Drawn 236 Compensate image FZ3 User s Manual 409 Flag for executing brightness Set Get 0 Not executed correction 1 Executed 410 Brightness correction Set Get 0to3 reference image No 112 Number of valid images Get Oto 4 200 Porsincstwindowimaae Set Get Camera number of foremost window of cameras used Polar Transformation No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 120 Cut out angle Set Get 0 to 359 122 Overlap Set Get O to 360 0 Image prior to transfer 1 Image after transfer Disp transferred 123 image Set Get FZ3 User s Manual Compensate image 237 sojqe 9U 1 J Y eu1 x7 sojqe soudJejJoy eu1 x7 Support measurement Calculation No Data name Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG gt i Ses ie i aan i 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 ee aa O esson 7 Seton Unmeasured 1 OK 1 NG 103 Reflect to overall judgement 0 ON 1 OFF 120 Upper limit 0 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 121 Lower limit 0 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 122 Upper limit 1 for
89. 2 Tap Rename 4 The soft keyboard is displayed 2 8 Basic Knowledge about Operations FZ3 User s Manual 3 Enter a new name Character input method Reference Inputting Text p 275 Note When a file or folder with the same name exists within the folder an error message will display telling you that you cannot change the name Deleting a Folder or File 1 Tap the name of file or folder to be deleted from the List View area The file or folder will be selected 2 Tap Delete A confirmation window is displayed 3 Tap OK The selected file or folder will be deleted Using the Zoom Function Specifies the magnification settings of the image displayed in the Properties window 100 000 LJ a D a Zoom browser Indicates where the zoom display area is in the original image b Magnification factor Input the magnification factor A factor of between 25 to 1600 can be input FZ3 User s Manual Basic Knowledge about Operations 279 sexipueddy sexipueddy C Operation buttons 280 Zoom in button Enlarges the selected area to twice its size Original size button Displays the selected area in the original size 2 Zoom out button Reduces the selected area by half lg Full screen button Enlarges the zoom browser to the entire screen and returns it to its original size Basic Knowledge about Operations FZ3 User s Manual Setting F
90. 232C 422 PLC Link p 126 Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 Non procedure p 147 FZ3 User s Manual FAQ 261 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy Measurement Mechanism This section describes how to configure measurement in accordance with the images acquired from cameras This product is prepared with comprehensive processing capabilities for measuring items Common processes for various processing items are described here Color Processing Mechanism The images acquired from cameras are available with color information such as R red G green B blue RGB images can render 16 7 million colors on the screen and adjustment of color intensity with a range of 0 to 255 can be performed For each of RGB black is rendered with a 0 value and white is rendered with a 255 value B During measurement of color images many colors can be measured by adjusting the RGB values When measuring the blue part 0 0 A G B 255 For monochrome cameras color processing is not performed search Processing Mechanism Reference image patterns are registered as models and then search is performed using the parts of input images that most resemble the models The degree of similarity is represented with a correlation value and inspection for defects and different parts being mixed in can be performed The search process is performed over several distinct stages 262 Measurement Mechanism FZ3 User s Manual
91. 6 DI5 DI4 to 0 Continuous Measure continuously He CODOREI ais Input Example ae 1 not see this signal so measurement during input of commands 10000000 a setting of either 0 or 1 makes no difference Switch to scene Scene Switch measurement Input Scene No in 2 l 1 01 switch scenes binary format Input Example 10100010 Switch to scene Scene group Switch measurement 44 Input Scene Group group 2 switch scene groups No in binary format Input Example 11100010 l Clear measurement eann values Input Example veasurement i The OR signaland DO l 1 oaan 11000000 Values signal are not cleared Clear error output TA TE Clear Error The ERROR indicator is 1 10 00001 P aa 11000001 also cleared Clear l ae el ae signal and 40 00010 sl A OR DO a 0 OFF 1 0ON Note When the input command is not received correctly the ERROR signal turns on During parallel continuous measurement and when the STEP signal is input continuously do not perform switching of the scene group When this is performed set Unchecked in Save scene group on switch scene in either of the settings items below Switch Scene Group window Reference Measure setting in the Measure menu Reference Switching Scene Groups p 50 Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement p 108 Output Format Each time measurement is performed the measurement result is output Output can be selected to turn on either
92. 8 Gravity Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 9 Reference area 0 to 999999999 10 Reference X Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 11 Reference Y Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 101 Output Coordinates ri SAR 102 Calibration 0 OFF 1 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement 0 ON 1 OFF 120 Max color difference 0 to 359 121 Min color difference 0 to 359 122 Max saturation 0 to 255 123 Min saturation 0 to 255 124 Max brightness 0 to 255 125 Min brightness 0 to 255 126 Extract image 0 OFF 1 ON 0 Black 1 White 127 Background color Set Get 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue 128 Reference area 0 to 999999999 129 Reference X 0 to 99999 130 Reference Y 0 to 99999 ii es monochrome i w illi 0 OFF 132 Filling up holes Set Get 1 ON TE AR 0 OFF 133 Outside trimming Set Get 1 ON 134 Upper limit of the object area range 0 to 999999999 9999 135 Lower limit of the object area range 0 to 999999999 9999 0 Area ascending 1 Area descending 136 Sort condition Set Get zie ASEENA 3 X descending 4 Y ascending 5 Y descending 137 Label No 0 to 2499 138 Upper limit of the number of labels 0 to 2500 139 Lower limit of the number of labels 0 to 2500 216 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 140 Upper limit of the area Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 141 Lower limit of the area Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 142 Upper limit of the gravity X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 143 Lower limit of the gravity X Set Get 99999 9999 to 9
93. 9 9999 to 99999 9999 238 Support measurement FZ3 User s Manual 13 Angle Get only 0 0000 to 180 0000 14 Point X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 15 Point Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 16 Distance Get only 0 0000 to 99999 9999 101 Output Coordinates Set Get PANOT SPTO 1 Before scroll E 0 OFF 102 Calibration Set Get 4 ON 0 Calculate line 120 Function type Set Get 1 Calculate cross point and angle of two lines 2 Calculate distance between line and point 121 Noise cancel 0 Set Get i AOS ee 1 Noise cancel ON 122 Noise cancel 1 Set Get i NOISE aa 1 Noise cancel ON 123 Number of points 0 Set Get 2to8 124 Number of points 1 Set Get 2to8 425 Method 0 O Nearest unit 1 Expression 126 Method 4 O Nearest unit 1 Expression Circle Regression Data range Data range 0 Specified point 1 Sampling 0 0000 to 99999 9999 No Data name Set Get 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Central X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Central Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Radius Get only 0 to 99999 9999 101 Output Coordinates Set Get PAL Sero 1 Before scroll 0 OFF 102 Calibration Set Get 4 ON 121 Number of points Set Get 3 to 8 122 Method Set Get a Doe 1 Expression Calibration No Data name Set Get 120 Coordinate indication method Set Get 200 to 208 Specified coordinate X Set Get 300 to 308 Specified coordinate Y
94. 9 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 1300 N Judgement condition feature quantity N 0 to 99 3 Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 4400 N Judgement condition feature quantity N 0 to 99 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 1500 N Judgement condition feature quantity N 0 to 99 9 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 1600 N Judgement condition feature quantity N 0 to 99 6 Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 221 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy sojqe soudJejJoy eu1 x7 1700 N Judgement condition feature quantity N 0 to 99 Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Label No 0 to 99 Defect No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Defect Get only 0 to 999 6 Position X Get only 0 to 99999 9999 7 Position Y Get only 0 to 99999 9999 8 Defect area Get only 0 to 999999999 9999 9 Defect gravity X Get only 0 to 99999 9999 10 Defect gravity Y Get only 0 to 99999 9999 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF 0 4 1 8 2 12 120 Upper limit of defect size Set Get 3 16 4 24 5 32 6 64 0 4 1 8 2 12 121 Lower limit of defect size Set Get 3 16 4 24 5 32 6 64 122 Defect judgement Set Get 0 to 999 123 Defect color Set Get 0 Both 1 White 2 Black 124 Area measurement Set Ge
95. 99 13 Sub region Number X Oto9 FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 201 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy sojqe soudJejJoy eu1 x7 14 Sub region Number Y Get only Oto 9 15 Sub region Pos X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 16 Sub region Pos Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 101 Output Coordinates Set Get penton oy 1 Before scroll ibrati 0 OFF 102 Calibration Set Get 4 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get et oe 1 OFF 0 OFF 121 With rotation Set Get 1 ON 122 Upper limit of the rotation angle Set Get 180 to 180 123 Lower limit of the rotation angle Set Get 180 to 180 124 Skipping angle Set Get 1 to 30 0 OFF 125 Smart mode Set Get 1 ON 126 Stab Set Get 1to 15 127 Prec Set Get 1to3 129 Reference X Set Get 0 to 9999 130 Reference Y Set Get 0 to 9999 132 Detection point X Set Get 0 to 9999 133 Detection point Y Set Get 0 to 9999 0 OFF 134 Sub pixel Set Get 1 ON 135 Candidate Point Level Set Get O to 100 136 Upper limit of measure X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 137 Lower limit of measure X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 138 Upper limit of measure Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 139 Lower limit of measure Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 140 Upper limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 141 Lower limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 142 Upper limit of the corr Set Get O to 100 143 Lower limit of the corr Set Get O to 100 144 Save registered model Set Get r ni T n
96. 9999 FZ3 User s Manual Display result Result Display No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured anage Oerony 1 Judgement result OK Display Image File No Data name Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 120 Number of files Set Get 1 to 4 121 Camera No 0 Set Get Oto3 122 Camera No 1 Set Get Oto3 123 Camera No 2 Set Get Oto3 124 Camera No 3 Set Get Oto3 Display Last NG Image No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Judge data N 5 to 12 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 N 0 to 7 0 No judgement unmeasured 13 to 20 E ae Set Get 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get ape ESY 1 OFF 0 One NG 120 Judgement mode Set Get 1 AIING 0 Image 121 Save type Set Get i imagesiale 122 Number of logging Set Get 1 to 4 123 Target processing unit Set Get 1 to 9999 number 1 Images in own processing unit saved 124 Image memory setting flag Set Get s a 140 to 147 ONOIR AP Set Get Exp character string for inclusion processing unit 0 N 0to7 FZ3 User s Manual Display result 247 s jqe 9Uu 1 J Y eu1 x7 s jqe soudJajoy eu1 x7 Upper limit of condition calculation M Set Get M 0 to 15 Eve
97. 9999 9999 144 Upper limit of the gravity Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 145 Lower limit of the gravity Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 146 Upper limit of the binary level Set Get 0 to 255 for monochrome cameras only 447 Lower limit of the binary level Set Get 0 to 255 for monochrome cameras only 148 Anan Image Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF for monochrome cameras only 0 Measurement image 149 Image kind Set Get RE ae ae 2 Selection color image 3 Binary image 150 Multiple selections Set Get 7 Sepe selections AAIEN 1 Multiple selections enabled 0 Not used 160 N x 10 Flag N used for registered color Set Get 1 Used l 0 OR 161 N x 10 Flag N for registered color OR NOT Set Get 1 NOT 162 N x 10 Register the max color hue N Set Get 0 to 359 163 N x 10 Register the min color hue N Set Get 0 to 359 164 N x 10 Register the max color saturation N Set Get 0 to 255 165 N x 10 Register the min color saturation N Set Get 0 to 255 166 N x 10 Register the max color brightness N Set Get 0 to 255 167 N x 10 Register the min color brightness N Set Get 0 to 255 0 Black 1 White 168 N x 10 Background color N Set Get 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue Label Data No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Label No Get 0 to 2499 6 Area Get 0 to 999999999 9999 7 Gravity X Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Gravity Y Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999
98. 99999 9999 140 Upper limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 141 Lower limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 142 Upper limit of the corr Set Get O to 100 143 Lower limit of the corr Set Get O to 100 144 Save registered model Set Get Mi n 145 Candidate Point Level Set Get O to 100 0 Corr ascending 1 Corr descending A 2 X ascending 146 Sort condition Set Get i 3 X descending 4 Y ascending 5 Y descending 148 Upper limit of count judgement Set Get 0 to 32 149 Lower limit of count judgement Set Get 0 to 32 f 0 OFF 150 Multiple output 1 ON 1000 NN x 4 NN 0 to 31 Correlation value O to 100 1001 NNx4 NN 0 to 31 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 1002 NN x4 NN 0 to 31 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 1003 NN x4 NN 010 31 ni A Sant Flexible Search No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 0 to 4 5 Model No Get only ee eee 6 Correlation value Get only O to 100 7 Measure X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Measure Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 9 Measure angle Get only 180 to 180 10 Reference X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 11 Reference Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 12 Reference angle Get only 180 to 180 13 Detection point X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 14 Detection point Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 101 Output Coordinates Set Get ETSO 1 Before scroll 102 Calibration Set Get 0 OFF 1 O
99. C oder Haakana se clans a a a E Ea AEO A EEE E ANS EENE E E 228 Circle Angle SCR 230 Compensate image cirri rr rn nr ni rir ii ei rite ciirrcirrriirerinees 931 Position Compensation 1 rttrrtr it i i i ir i ri ii i iii rire irre aiereeresiies 2341 Trapezoidal Correctiont lt crirttt rrr i ln irr irriicirrirerireeias 2341 Filtering LEE 232 Background Suppression tttsttttrstrrtttrtrrrttrrttrtrestrrtnrrtntnttrntenrenttnntnnnnEnnnnnnEnnEEnEnEn EEEn 232 Color Gray ll gt eee 233 Extract Color Piltepaveccessaess bontacdsnedesastenensececaanocnactheenuuatvedsseanelebeupnererecedneseuesnrnendarceonat 234 Anti Color Shading 1 ttt rrr rr irr nr nn rrr li rn ir iii tit cirriirrriirrraines 235 Stripes Removal Filtert ttsrrrstrsrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrsrrrrrrrrrrnrrrennrnrenrrrrtnnnrnnrnnrnnentnntennnennEEEn 235 Halaton Gulk eeaeee Ra uenaueeecexedecete nace sneGeaeeeescenscnesunenteaceeeer 236 Panoraamat eiia e ee aa aa a ere AA a ee eee eee 236 Polar TranstOrimation aani Tomsteri n a a a a a E a 237 Support Measurement t r rtrrrrtrrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrrtrrnterrenrrrnnrnrrnrrntentEnttEnEnrEnnEnnEnnEEnnEn EEEE 238 Cacuia aAa Eea A E E eee en E Cee eer ee eee eee y 238 Line Regressions ttt ttt rt rt rn nr nt i in ir irri tiicrtinereirer inter g 238 Circle Regression irr rr rt rr tn ru rin rei iiiiiiirtecireriirttg 239 Calibration Sneue esae a a A ES 239 Sat Unt Data ae e a a a aaa a aE 240 Tes Me eh eB fee eee eee a ee a eee 240 Set Unit Figure rsttrtrrttrttt
100. CR CRETE TEETER ERE ORUACL CRT CET TER CR CCRT E TCL ET ee ere eee 56 Renaming a Scene Group eRe RE Oe EEE SUNT Re eee ee a MO ee ee eee ee Pn ne ee er eee eee Re en a ea Ne oe 56 3 Performing Test Measurement Starting Operation PE E E A A EA E E 59 ADJUST Window and RUN Window THER TTT Cee RITE Ce Te TTR ee ERE CENT ETM ROR ee eee ee A 60 FZ3 User s Manual 1 ADJUST Window TPE CCL Re ERT ECE CE CECT CLEC CECE CAE COT CEE RCE ESE eT ee ee eee eee Re ae ee eee a ee ee a 60 RUN WINGOW r ssssssessnununnnnnnununnnnnnununnununununnununununnununununnunununuununununuununnnunuunuunnnnnnnnnnnn 60 Switching to the RUN WINGOW sssssssssssssnunnununununnununununnununnnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnn 62 Switching to the ADJ UST WINGOW cit tt ttt tte etree eee e eee ee eee e eee eee ene naaeeenaaae enna enaae enna 62 Performing Test Measurement rrsssssssssssssesenununnunununuunununununnunununuununununuunununnnuunnnunnnnnnnnnn 63 Key Points for Adjustment PECRPCCOPCCOCSCOCCCOSOCO oC eee eee Cee e eee eco reece eee reer reer reer eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee 65 Stabilizing Measurement rrrsssssssessnenunnenunununnunununuunununununnunununuununununuununununuunnnnnnnnnnnnnn 65 Shortening Processing TiIMe ere 67 Arranging the RUN WINGOW sssssssssssssnnnunununnununununnununununnununununnunununnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnn 68 Displaying Multiple Windows Together OCR P CCCP CCCP eCeee Cree Cer eec errr errr reer reer reer reer ee eee eee
101. Command execution result 5 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 137 SOOIAAQ JEUO XJ y m BuljedluNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 Moningala N10 IZ 10 0000 0000 0000 0000 11 0000 0000 0000 0000 Date data 1 to 31 12 0000 0000 0000 0000 13 0000 0000 0000 0000 Time data 0 to 23 14 0000 0000 0000 0000 15 0000 0000 0000 0000 Minute data 0 to 59 16 0000 0000 0000 0000 17 0000 0000 0000 0000 Second data 0 to 59 Acquiring Version Information Acquires the controller version information Command PLC to Controller Command area Command Bit DEN top channel code 15 12 11 8 a 3 0 p 2 3000 0011 0000 0000 0000 Sat camnand 3 0040 0000 0000 0100 0000 codes Response Controller to PLC Response B it 3 0000 Store response target command codes Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 Version information character string 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Setting Unit Data Sets the specified processing unit data ESE In Set Unit Data Get Unit Data
102. Data Output p 398 The range of values that can be output is as follows 2147483 648 lt Measurement value lt 2147483 647 When measurement value Is lt 214 7483 648 2147483 648 is output When measurement value is gt 2147483 647 2147483 647 is output When JG Judgement is set the next value is output OK 1000 1 x 1000 NG 1000 1 x 1000 Note Even if measurement is complete data output will not stop until all of the data is output Please note data output will not be interrupted FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 177 SOOINAQ JEUO XJ y m BuljealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt s 91A9d EUA X3 y m Bueolunwwuo pue Bunoauuo JO SPON gt This section describes how to set communication specifications and the I O format required when communicating with external devices through a parallel interface Set the controller communication specifications Use the same communication specification settings for the controller and the external device Note During setting of communication specifications input signals cannot be handled However the input status can be checked with Confirmation Reference Checking Communication Status Parallel Interface p 180 1 On the Main screen tap System Communication Parallel The Parallel window is displayed 2 Tap Setting to set communication specifications Confirmation
103. EHNSENEHNENNHSHNENHSEHNEHNEHSENNZHNENHSENHEHNENEENHNENNN 183 Externally Outputting Data through et De 192 Setting Communication Specifications SPCC ePCCPeCre ere rr creer reer reece rere errr rer reer reer reer eee eee ee eee eee 192 Communication Example PCC eP CCP eCCeeCCeeCr reece rrr errr reer reer reer rere errr rere reer reer eee ee eee eee eee ee eee ee 193 7 External Reference Tables ccc i HI REE HE UE no RATU 195 Input image SEC PP CCT CCCo CeCe S CCL OCe CC CoCCCo ee Cee e CeCe Cee e Cee e eee Ce Teer e ee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee 198 Measurement Image Switching SECC P PCCP CCCP PCOSS COS SCCoCCo CeCe eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee ee ee 198 Measurement ttt ttt ttt tee enna eee ener e eee e ener e eee e nee eee eee eee ena eae eee naan enaeeenaeaeeees 199 Search PCCP CCe Peer err eer r rere re rrrrrr errr rerrrrr reer errr rrr rr rer rer rr rrr errr reer rere r errr ee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee 199 Flexible Search SECC P CCCP CCCP eCr rece rere rrrr errr rer reer reer reer rer rrr rrr rrr reer rere reer reer eee eee eee eee eee eee ee ee eee 200 Sensitive Search SPCC ePCCr eC rrrrrrrecrr rere err errr errr errr reer rere rrr rrr rrr errr errr errr eer eee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee 201 ECM Search SECRET CPPCCOoSCoCCCO LoCo CeCe CeCe See Tere Cee e eee eee eee ee eee reer eee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee ee 203 EC Circle Search PeCte rere Crrrrrrrrr reer errr reer errr rrr rr
104. FF Set Get 1 ON Set Get 0 to 255 Set Get 0 to 255 Set Get 0 to 255 Set Get 0 to 127 Set Get O to 127 Set Get O to 127 0 Color IN Seer 1 Color OUT Set Get 0 to 99999 9999 Set Get 0 to 99999 9999 Set Get 0 to 99 Set Get O to 100 Set Get 0 to 442 Set Get 0 to 9999 Set Get 0 to 442 Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measurement 211 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy s jqe soudJajoy eu1 x7 137 Lower limit of the maximum edge position X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 138 Upper limit of the maximum edge position Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 139 Lower limit of the maximum edge position Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 140 Upper limit of the minimum edge position X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 141 Lower limit of the minimum edge position X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 142 Upper limit of the minimum edge position Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 143 Lower limit of the minimum edge position Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 144 Upper limit of the edge position X Ave Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 145 Lower limit of the edge position X Ave Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 146 Upper limit of the edge position Y Ave Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 147 Lower limit of the edge position Y Ave Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 148 Upper limit of the long distance Max Set Get 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX 149 Lower limit of the
105. Format Non procedure p 176 Measurement result Starts continuous measurement Starts continuous measurement lt Command format gt lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally OKE Hsaeurement result Chl Continuous measurement count Measurement result When processing is not performed normally 160 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual lt Parameters explanation gt The measurement results from the number of times continuous measurement is performed are output as a response Reference Output Format Non procedure p 176 Measurement result Completes continuous measurement Continuous measurement ends lt Command format gt lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally O K ce When processing is not performed normally Measurement is continuously executed Measurement result To output measurement results insert a Data Output processing unit in the scene When the scene does not have a Data Output processing unit only a command response is output Reference Output Format Non procedure p 176 Reference Processing Item List Manual Data Output p 398 RESET Restart the controller lt Command format gt lt Response format gt OFF SCENE orS Acquires scene No Acquires the current scene No FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Co
106. JUST Window and RUN Window FZ3 User s Manual Normal Mode RUN Window To display mbaSsuUMING time and Ams 0 Scene overall judgment results of total Scene O Scene group 0 T display the MiG unit in red To cascade measured To display measured Display method of the Switches to Switches to the resulis in camera image results in text format image canbe changed Simplified non stop ADJUST window adjustment mode When processing is taking a long time it is necessary to check processing items and setting values The time required for measurement is also displayed with the measurement results so use this for reference Fast View Mode RUN Window Simplifies display items and makes the display speed faster RUN x 0 scene group U U scene U L FIod i Tehi t APRUT mie Doa y FZ3 User s Manual ADJUST Window and RUN Window 61 uogeJsado Buleis juUswWeINses s L Burwood v uogesado BulweysjuUswWaINses s BUIWUOLIEd Oo Switching to the RUN Window 1 Tap Switch to RUN mode in the ADJUST window DESTE qe 0 ADJUST a o a Window switches to the RUN window Note You can make settings so that the RUN window is displayed whenever power to the controller is turned on Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 112 Lighting gradually gets darker if it is used for a long time so adjust judgement conditions perio
107. List of Sub Image Numbers Classification Processing item Sub image number and display 0 Measurement image ECM Search 1 Measurement image displayed with matching edges Edge Position Edge Pitch overlaid Measurement image Profile display Measurement image Profile display Scan Edge Position Scan Edge Width Measurement image Scan region Measurement image Precise Defect Fine Matching Scan region Gravity and Area Measurement image Extracted image Measurement image pane Extracted image bapeling l Measurement image Color extraction image Defect Measurement image Defect profile when area measurement is present Measurement image Defect profile when area measurement is present Measurement image Difference image display 2D measurement Measurement Image Switching Position Compensation Trapezoidal Correction Extract Color Filter Stripes Removal Filter Halation Cut Panoramat Polar Transformation Display Image File Display Last NG Image 72 Arranging the RUN Window Reset image Measurement image After compensation Before compensation Post conversion image Color extraction image Measurement image Post conversion image Color extraction image Post combination image Post conversion image Measurement image Image 0 Image 1 Image 2 Image 3 Last NG Previous NG error im
108. Lower limit of radius Set Get 0 to 99999 9999 171 Search type Set Get r PA n 0 X ascending 1 X descending 2 Y ascending 173 Sort condition Set Get AN 5 Eva descending 6 Radius ascending 7 Radius descending a st a 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 a a e a 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 aaa FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 205 sojqe soudJejoy jeule xXy sojqe soudJejJoy eu1 x7 1003 N x4 N 0 to 255 Radius Get only 0 to 99999 9999 Shape Search 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Correlation value Get only O to 100 6 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 9 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 10 Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 11 Reference angle Get only 180 to 180 12 Detected coordinate X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 13 Detected coordinate Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 ERL Magnification X of search results designated 15 Magnification X Get only by Search No ok ald Magnification Y of search results designated 16 Magnification Y Get only by Search Na Correlation value of search results 17 Correlation value array Get only designated by Label No for external reference 48 postion x anancement tony Position X of search results designated by Label No for external reference 49 position t amangement Get only Position Y of search results designated by Label No for external reference Measu
109. MDisk and then can be copied from the RAMDisk and saved to the USBDisk using Copy files in Save to file 7 Tap OK Settings are confirmed and the Logging Setting window closes portant ccc Logging images saved in the controller memory are overwritten starting with the oldest image if the upper limit for the number of save images is exceeded Reference About Number of Logging Images p 292 The data saved in the controller memory or RAMDisk is deleted when the controller is restarted FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 87 uogesado Bulwels juUswWeiNses s L BUIWUOLIEd v uogesado BulweysjuUswWaINses s BUIWUOLIEd Oo Note About image logging When the number of files in the save destination folder increases the time needed for image saving increases If Camera Image Input is used several times in a flow the image from the last Camera Image Input is saved About number of images that can be saved This will vary depending on the size of the images and the resolution of the connected camera The number of images that can be saved on the RAMDisk or USBDisk depends on free capacity If RAMDisk is selected this depends on the controller memory capacity If USBDisk is selected this depends on the USBDisk capacity The following methods can be used to increase the number of images that can be saved on the RAMDisk or USBDisk Shorten file names when saving directly under the root direct
110. Manual Flexible Search p 53 Measuring chip components Processing Item Selection Guidelines 45 MO 4 u wanseapw SoUBDS Huas MO 4 JUsLUaJNSes SoUdDS Huas When precision is required for measurement of markings Fine Matching Effective when there are patterns on the background of markings markings have a complex shape or precision is required for measurement of markings Reference Processing ltem List Manual Fine Matching p 224 Measuring LOG Checking for mixing of different objects Method objective Inspection for mixing of different measurement objects with variations Inspection for mixing of different objects for objects with plain background When precision is required for inspection of mixing of different objects References Flexible Search Effective for inspection of mixing of different objects in which there are variations with markings and the shape of measurement objects Reference Processing ltem List Manual Flexible Search p 53 Disparity judge Search Effective for inspection of mixing of different objects for packaging that has plain background Reference Processing ltem List Manual Search p 42 Fine Matching Effective when precision is required for inspection of mixing of different objects such as inspection of nameplates and objects other than those with plain backgrounds Reference Processing Item List Manual Fine
111. Manual Processing Item Selection Guidelines 43 MO 4 u wanseapw SoUdDS Huas MO 4 u wanseapw SoUBDS Huas Detecting defects and foreign materials Method objective References Detecting defects contaminations Defect and spots on plain measurement objects Scratches burrs Inspection for minor scratches contamination and backgrounds other than plain backgrounds Count Method objective Effective for detection of contamination or spots on plain backgrounds Reference Processing Item List Manual Defect p 208 Defect Effective for exterior detection of scratches and burrs on parts Reference Processing Item List Manual Defect p 208 Defect Burr measurement Fine Matching Effective for detection of minor defects and contamination on labels etc Reference Processing Item List Manual Fine Matching p 224 References Edge Pitch Effective when calculating the number of IC or connector pins Reference Processing Item List Manual Edge Pitch p 124 Inspection for number of pins Measuring number of IC pins 44 Processing Item Selection Guidelines FZ3 User s Manual Measuring dimensions Method objective Measuring width of measurement objects Dimension inspection of finished products Dimension inspection for circular shapes and obliquely shaped parts References Edge Position Effective when measuring the width of mea
112. Matching p 224 46 Processing Item Selection Guidelines FZ3 User s Manual Checking for deformation Method objective References Deformation checking when there are multiple acceptable shapes When more precisely measuring the shape Flexible Search Effective when performing inspection for deformation of measurement objects based on multiple acceptable shapes Reference Processing Item List Manual Flexible Search p 53 Fine Matching Effective when inspecting the shape of work pieces to a high degree of precision Reference Processing Item List Manual Fine Matching p 224 Inspecting characters Method objective Inspecting the date Inspecting arbitrary character strings Registering character strings References Date Verification Effective when inspecting date character strings that show the production date etc The verification date can be set automatically Reference Processing Item List Manual Date Verification p 242 Character Inspection Effective when inspecting arbitrary character strings Reference Processing Item List Manual Character Inspection p 235 Model Dictionary To inspect character strings with Date Verification or Character Inspection register the target character strings with Model Dictionary Reference Processing Item List Manual Model Dictionary p 251 FZ3 User s Manual Processing Item Selection Guidelines 47 MO 4 u wan
113. N 200 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF 120 Search mode Set Get i oa 0 OFF 121 With rotation 1 ON 122 Upper limit of the rotation angle 180 to 180 123 Lower limit of the rotation angle 180 to 180 124 Skipping angle 1 to 30 0 OFF 125 Smart mode 1 ON 126 Stab CR 1to15 127 Prec 1to3 128 Stab PT 1to5 0 OFF 134 Sub pixel 1 ON 135 Candidate Point Level 0 to 100 136 Upper limit of measure X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 137 Lower limit of measure X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 138 Upper limit of measure Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 139 Lower limit of measure Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 140 Upper limit of the angle 180 to 180 141 Lower limit of the angle 180 to 180 142 Upper limit of the corr O to 100 143 Lower limit of the corr O to 100 Sensitive Search No Data name Data range cy 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 1 Correlation value O to 100 cei For color cameras 0 000 to 219 9705 2 Deviation Get only For monochrome cameras 0 000 to 127 000 3 Measure X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 4 Measure Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 5 Measure angle 180 to 180 6 Detection point X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 Detection point Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Reference X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 9 Reference Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 10 Reference angle 180 to 180 11 NG Sub region 0 to 100 12 Sub region Number 0 to
114. OO 0 3 megapixel camera 640 pixels X 480 pixels 2 megapixel camera 1600 pixels x 1200 pixels 5 megapixel camera 2432 pixels x 2044 pixels For monochrome cameras 0 3 megapixel camera 2 megapixel camera 5 megapixel camera WES 6 4 Ii alaa controller 1 camera 2 camera 1 camera 1 camera camera camera F73 3 OO FZ3 H3 OO F73 7 OOF 84 63 FZ73 H7 OO 0 3 megapixel camera 640 pixels X 480 pixels 2 megapixel camera 1600 pixels x 1200 pixels 5 megapixel camera 2432 pixels x 2044 pixels 292 About Number of Logging Images E camera camera ajhoj f camera camera camera FZ3 User s Manual About Limits on the Number of Image Input Processing ltems Used The number of image input related processing items that can be used within one scene is limited by the combinations of the camera If the limit is exceeded a measurement NG occurs due to a memory shortage during measurement Please use within this processing items limitation Limit on number of image Camera used input related processing items 0 3 megapixel color camera 80 0 3 megapixel monochrome camera 244 2 megapixel color camera Note 1 13 2 megapixel monochrome camera Note 1 39 5 megapixel color camera Note 1 6 5 megapixel monochrome camera Note 1 18 Note 1 2 megapixel cameras and 5 megapixel cameras can only be used with the FZ3 7 LIL series Image input related processing items The applicable processing items a
115. OR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM Programmable Products Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable Product or any consequence thereof Performance Data Data presented in Omron Company websites catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitabil ity and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of Omron s test conditions and the user must correlate it to actual application require ments Actual performance is subject to the Omron s Warranty and Limitations of Liability Change in Specifications Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our prac tice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifica tions of the Product may be changed without any notice When in doubt spe cial part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application Please consult with your Omron s representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased Product Errors and Omissions Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions OMROMN Automation simple powerful
116. R 126 MIN G 127 MAX G 128 MIN B 129 MAX B 130 Lower limit for shading 131 Upper limit for shading 132 Filtered image 200 Transfer source image number 201 Transfer destination image number Color Gray Filter 0 RGB common Set Get 1 RGB individual Set Get 0 to 255 Set Get 0 to 255 Set Get 0 to 255 Set Get 0 to 255 Set Get 0 to 255 Set Get 0 to 255 Set Get 0 to 255 Set Get 0 to 255 Set Get 0 to 255 Set Get 0 to 255 Mia aaa Set Get 0 to 9 Set Get 0 to 9 No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG l l 0 RGB filter 100 Filter kind Set Get 4 HSV filter 0 Red filter 1 Green filter 2 Blue filter 3 Cyan filter 101 RGB filter kind Set Get 4 Magenta filter 5 Yellow filter 6 Brightness filter R G B 7 Brightness filter R 2G B 8 Custom filter 102 Gain Red Set Get 0 0001 to 9 9999 103 Gain Green Set Get 0 0001 to 9 9999 104 Gain Blue Set Get 0 0001 to 9 9999 105 HSV filter kind Set Get n 1 Fine 106 Standard Hue Set Get 0 to 359 107 Hue range Set Get 10 to 180 108 PPAT an Set Get 0 to 255 Saturation 109 ee Set Get 0 to 255 Saturation FZ3 User s Manual Compensate image 233 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy sojqe soudJajoy eu1 x7 Extract Color Filter No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1
117. SB memory before turning off power to the controller OE ccc During data transfer do not turn off the power When a message indicating that processing such as saving or loading is in progress is displayed do not restart the controller or turn off the power Data will be corrupted and the system will not work properly at the next startup Do not remove USB memory devices during saving or loading Operation of the controller may damage data or the USB memory Do not change the extension of saved files If changed the file cannot be loaded as the setting data In addition if setting data in which the extension was changed is loaded the system may not work properly later Depending on the settings saving may fail due to insufficient USB memory capacity If saving fails and the error message Please check appears check to see if there is unnecessary data in the USB memory and save after this data has been deleted About USB Drive Names The controller is equipped with 4 USB connectors If multiple USB memory devices are plugged in specify the USB memory drive that is to be the destination The drive names of USB memory devices are called USBDisk USBDisk2 USBDisk3 and USBDisk4 according to the sequence in which devices are inserted into the controller If the controller however is started with more than one USB memory device inserted drive names will be assigned based on the ports in which the USB memory devices are inserted Dependin
118. Size of figures Get only Size of figures acquired 120 121 1000 100 x N N 0 to 9 1001 100 x N N 0 to 9 1002 100 x N to Target processing Set Get unit No 0 to 9999 Target figure No Set Get 0 to 999 Figure N type N 0 to 9 Figure N drawing mode N 0 to 9 Figure N data 00 to Figure N data 1022 100xN_ 20 N 0 to 9 N 0 to 9 Trend Monitor Figure O type 0x0000 Undefined Ox0001 Point Ox0002 Line Ox0004 Wide line Ox0008 Rectangle 0x0010 Ellipse 0x0020 Circle Ox0040 Wide circle Ox0080 Arc 0x0100 Wide arc 0x0200 Polygon Set to 0 if no figures are acquired Get only Figure N drawing mode Figure N data 0 to 20 Get only The amount of valid data differs with data type Set to 0 if disabled or no figures are acquired Get only No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Measurement Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 0 OFF 6 Warning Get only 1 ON 7 Maximum Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 8 Minimum Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 9 Average Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 10 Deviation Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 11 Count Get only 0 to 999999999 12 NG count Get only 0 to 999999999 13 Warning count Get only O to 999999999 103 pe aay Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF judgement 121
119. Vision Sensor FZ3 Series User s Manual Cat No Z290 E1 01 Introduction Thank you for purchasing the FZ3 Series This manual provides information regarding functions performance and operating methods that are required for using the FZ3 Series When using the FZ3 Series be sure to observe the following e The FZ3 Series must be operated by personnel knowledgeable in electrical engineering e To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly to deepen your understanding of the product e Please keep this manual in a safe place so that it can be referred to whenever necessary Contents 1 Before Operation PE AEETI AE EETA PEIE SETT TTE E T TEE T AET A TATE 7 Operation Flow a a A E a a A a a E a E E Taa ee RT Pe Oe ee ECE a a A A E A a a E ee 8 Layouts of Screens Windows E E A A EE E a EE E a E 9 Layout of Main Screen ADJ UST Window RT RRR Ee AOR eee eR A RCRCE Re RR ERR ee eee Ee Ree eRe oe RR eRe ea eM CRT Re SRR RRR he 9 Layout of Main Screen RUN Window UTI E CECE eT eT ECT Te Tee CVE ERR Ce ee ec a a ek re 12 Layout of Edit Flow Window Verret Cee ee Te ECL A A A E ECAR eR Ce eT ee ee ee ee eee ee eee ee 15 Layout of Property Setting Window TATE CeCe Te TLE Ce CE I ee CE RE ee aR RCE oe aE RR ee eke 17 Checking System Configuration E A E A Dem msi mmm A E cay ae ea 18 Basic Configuration of FZ3 Series TET CCT TEE RR aa ETE TE CERT a a a a a Ee a Ee ae 18 Preparing Controllers and Cameras TREN ENeT RR eee CRC eT ER ee
120. a Gravity X Gravity Y Gravity XY Elliptic axis angle Elliptic major axis Elliptical approximate minor axis Ratio of approximate ellipse Width of circumscribed rectangle Height of circumscribed rectangle 10 Upper left X coordinate of circumscribed rectangle 11 Upper left Y coordinate of circumscribed Set Get rectangle 12 Perimeter 13 Circularity 14 Major axis of rotating rectangle 15 Minor axis of rotating rectangle 16 Ratio of rotating rectangle 17 Center of inscribed circle X 18 Center of inscribed circle Y 19 Center of inscribed circle XY 20 Radius of inscribed circle 21 Center of circumscribed circle X 22 Center of circumscribed circle Y 23 Center of circumscribed circle XY 24 Radius of circumscribed circle N Q1 Set Get Set Get Number of holes Row sort Row sort Ascending Descending All Specified label 912 915 516 517 Union flag for extraction area Label number display flag Feature quantity display flag Line region draw flag Set Get Set Get OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 518 519 520 220 Sort row column sequence 2 Dynamic binary classification Extraction offset value Measurement Set Get Set Get Ascending Descending Light Dark Equal Not equal to 127 FZ3 User s Manual 601 N x 10 OFF Area Gravity X Gravity Y
121. ads scene data lt Command format gt SICINIL OJAD a Fil name of scene data scene No max 2 digits C lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally lt Parameters explanation gt Scene No Specifies the scene No to be read 0 to 31 Specifies the name of the file to be read with a definite path File name of Only files that are under the following systems and have an SCN extension can be read scene data USBDisk RAMDisk If the specified file name already exists this existing file will be overwritten Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When LABEL SCN in the IMG01 folder of the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned is loaded to the controller as scene 2 lt Command gt FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 165 SOOINAQ JEUO XJ y m BuljeoluNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt lt Response gt O K r SCNSAVE Saves scene data lt Command format gt Save destination scene No max 2 digits lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally O K ER When processing is not performed normally lt Parameters explanation gt Scene No Specifies the scene No to save 0 to 31 Specifies the save destination and file name during saving with a defi
122. age Displayed when there are 2 or more saved images Otherwise Last NG is displayed 2 NG error image from 2 previous Displayed when there are 3 or more saved images Otherwise Last NG is displayed 3 NG error image from 3 previous Displayed when there are 4 or more saved images Otherwise Last NG is displayed OJO N gt O OIOJIOJOJ gt OIOI gt OJ gt 07 7 0 7 0 7 OJ gt OJ gt 0 70 27 OJ gt OJ gt 0 2 O FZ3 User s Manual Enlarging Measurement Images Zoom Images Set the measurement image zoom status magnification and display position During display of multiple images magnification can be set for each image 1 On the Main screen tap View Zoom images A magnification setting tab is displayed in the top right of the measurement image 2 Set the magnification as required Setting item eee ult Description gt Auto 25 50 Measurement image magnification 100 er setting 200 Sets magnification 400 800 1600 3 Drag images to specify the display position as required 4 On the Main screen tap View Zoom images The current magnification and display position are saved Displaying Flow and Detailed Results Switches display of Flow and Detail result on off of in the Control area Note The same operation is available by tapping View Flow or Detail result 1 Tap Flow or Detail result in the Control area Flow or det
123. agnification X Get only 50 to 150 10 Magnification Y Get only 50 to 150 11 Reference X Get only 99999 9999 to 9999 9999 12 Reference Y Get only 99999 9999 to 9999 9999 13 Reference angle Get only 180 to 180 14 Detection point X Get only 99999 9999 to 9999 9999 15 Detection point Y Get only 99999 9999 to 9999 9999 101 Output Coordinates Set Get AOT SETO 1 Before scroll sits oe 0 OFF 102 Calibration Set Get 4 ON 0 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get 1 OFF 0 3x3 l 15x5 120 Mask size Set Get 27x7 3 9x9 121 Edge Level Set Get 0 to 255 FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 203 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy s jqe soudJajoy eu1 Xx7 122 Detection point X Set Get 99999 9999 to 9999 9999 123 Detection point Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 9999 9999 124 Reference X Set Get 0 to 99999 9999 125 Reference Y Set Get 0 to 99999 9999 126 Upper limit of the corr Set Get O to 100 127 Lower limit of the corr Set Get O to 100 128 Upper limit of measure X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 129 Lower limit of measure X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 130 Upper limit of measure Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 131 Lower limit of measure Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 132 Upper limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 133 Lower limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 134 Candidate Point Level Set Get 0 to 99 135 Model skipping Set Get 1 to 9 136 Region skipping Set Get 1 to 19
124. ails of measurement results are displayed Tapping once again returns the screen to the previous status FZ3 User s Manual Arranging the RUN Window 73 uogesado Bulweys juUswWeINses s BUIWOLIEd v uogesado BulweysjuUswWaINses s BUIWUOLIEd Oo Detail result Lenn Fimage view setting mage layoul fi imaqe 2 When displaying both the flow and detailed results you can change the size of the Display area of the flow and detailed results by dragging Detail result meri EET i ILE HTE FFI Switching the RUN Window to Fast View Mode Select RUN Mode Switches the mode of the RUN window Fast view mode simplifies display items and makes the display speed faster 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Select RUN mode The Select RUN Mode window is displayed 2 Tap and select a mode Select start mode RUN normal mofa Hele OK Canca l 14 Arranging the RUN Window FZ3 User s Manual Set value Factory default Description RUN normal mode RUN fast view mode Selects which mode is used to display the RUN window 3 Tap OK The Select RUN Mode window closes Changing Display Contents on the RUN Window Measurement Information Display Area The display contents on the RUN window measurement information display area can be changed Reference Setting the RUN Window Display RUN Mode View Setting p 114 Changing Functions That
125. al Inspection ls shape of marking changed 7 Procltem name Judgment condition ls marking oblique ud ged by marking Judged by color density O Judge by color difference j 38 Processing Item Selection Guidelines FZ3 User s Manual Presence Inspection Is shape of tag non specific For specific shape ls shape of marking changed Is marking oblique Cue For non specific shape For tag with specific color Dimension Inspection Measurement Longitudinal ar transverse FZ3 User s Manual Prochem name Flexible Search Gravity and Area Procltam name Processing Item Selection Guidelines 39 MO 4 JUsLUaINSes SoUsDS Buas Burr Inspection Procltem name Defect Text Comparison Inspection Do you want to set the date to be checked automatically Procitem name Are the character types more than two Yes Charader inspection MO 4 JUsLUaINSes SoUsDS Buas No ls shape of character changed Flexible search ls character oblique 40 Processing Item Selection Guidelines FZ3 User s Manual Defect Contamination Inspection Procltem name ls defect with background Defect Does backoround Ss fineness of characters position eT and ines n graph consistent Yes defects exist in characters Deflected graph and models Fine Matching ABC ABC Search Are defect with specific col
126. alid only when Output control is set to None Set the cycle by which measurement results are output Set the cycle so that the interval is equal to or higher than Gate ON delay Output time and lower than measurement interval If the cycle is longer than the measurement interval output timing will be delayed while measurement is being repeated Set the time from when results are output to the parallel interface to when the GATE signal turns on Waiting time until data output is stable Set this so that it is longer than the external device delay time Valid only when Output control is set to None or Synchronization output Set the GATE signal ON time Set the time required for external devices to acquire measurement results Valid only when Output control is set to Handshaking A timeout error occurs when no response from external devices is received within the time that has been set Valid only when Output control is set to Synchronization output Set the number of times that the STEP signal turning on will be ignored before measurement results of the STEP signal are output Select whether to maintain OR signal output for an arbitrary amount of time Set the OR signal output time Valid only when One shot OR signal is set to ON Set a value that is lower than the measurement time The settings are confirmed and the Parallel window closes FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Com
127. and unnecessary parts can be excluded form the area Each time OR NOT ba o7 is tapped the setting of the selected figure toggles between OR and NOT mportcnt Images with only the NOT setting cannot be drawn ltem Description OR Used when drawing a model or a region NOT pR 1 Switching between OR and NOT occurs each time the button is tapped 290 Setting Figures FZ3 User s Manual OR NOT The selected figure is displayed with a dotted line in the OK color When drawing multiple figures the entire area is registered as one region The selected figure is displayed with a dotted line in the NG color The area outside of the NOT image is registered as the region Example The grey parts are measurement regions EEEE Image 1 down by OR Image 2 down by NOT Ma Image 3 down by OR FZ3 User s Manual Setting Figures 291 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy About Number of Logging Images The maximum number of logged images _ MAX that can be stored in the controller s memory varies depending on the type of the controller in use and the type and number of connected cameras For color cameras 0 3 megapixel camera 2 es camera Type of Palle controller 1 camera 2 camera 1 camera 1 camera camera camera camera camera camera camera camera camera 5 megapixel camera FZ3 3 OO FZ3 H3 OO F73 7 OO 250 125 83 62 m wes a Ie F FZ3 H7
128. ange of specified Does not comply to the conditions of expression Please check the content aaeei Reference Processing Item List Manual Settings Calculation p 328 expression The problem Is the camera cable connected to the controller occurred in the Is camera cable disconnected camera Do Select camera of Camera Image Input and Camera Switching have any errors connection Please check the contents of Camera setting then switch off and restart ME ERR Failed to start the window Memory is insufficient Reference Setting Conditions for Camera Use p 106 Because memory available for use was insufficient memory needed to open the window could not be secured Check the flow and adjust measurement regions of each processing unit and the size of registered models Shape search If shape search setup window is opened while the RAM Disk memory is insufficient for image logging on the RAM Disk a warning message is displayed n the case that a image logging file is stored in the RAM Disk please move the content on the RAM Disk to a USB Disk to open up memory and reopen the set up window Warning range shall be set within the range from judgement lower to upper limit Please redefine the upper and lower warning range limits so that they are within the range between the lower and upper judgement limits Reference Processing Item List Manual Judgement Conditions Trend Monitor p 367 Thi
129. anual Externally Outputting Data through FTP 193 SOOINAQ JEUJO XJ y m BuljeoluNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOIAGQ JEUO XJ uyim BuljealuNWWOD pue Bunoauuo JO SPON gt wa O Fie and Folder Tasks Fie Edt Mig Few crites Tools Help a Addhass Pepi 0 5 5 7 On Ea py LARON Miosan Ilermet Liplorer 5 m Mooark D Mahe anew folder gD Publeh this tolder bo the Web E hamn thes fadi Other Places Folder name a oncror aru USS gaa She l dal i gd F Ke Description Network This folder is used for management Data cannot be saved within this folder This folder is for storing logging images and data files When the RAMDisk is set as RAMDisk ar l a the save destination files are stored in this folder l Displayed when a USBDisk is plugged into the controller When the USBDisk is set USBDisk _ e as the save destination files are stored in this folder ae This file is used for management Do not delete this file Panel lnk 2 To view the inside of the RAMDisk enter RAMDisk at the end of the IP address When the RAMDisk is set as the image logging destination the logging files are displayed Pw LOS 000 RAM Dsk Miesai Intervet Explorer Adress e Frog 0 5 5 00 Rates Other Plates FT 10 5 5 100 Hie Doaa Ga Cheer mumera My Nebwork Placas fefe208 09 0 06 2 6 22 00 Fa Leb FL Fil waren al a BEEE 0 10 2210 Lich IFZ Rk iad miana aan Len F2 Rik man
130. area divisions Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Get only 0 to 255 Get only 0 to 255 Get only Measurement 213 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy sojqe soudJejJoy eu1 x7 Average B component value Get only 0 to 255 Color difference Get only 0 to 442 Color deviation Get only O to 219 9705 10 pepsi average Getonly _ 0 000 to 255 000 for monochrome cameras only 11 A Sevlalony alle Getonly 10 000 to 127 000 for monochrome cameras only 12 Reference average value Get only 0 000 to 255 000 13 Reference deviation value Get only 0 000 to 127 000 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get e ie 1 OFF izati 0 OFF 120 Normalization Set Get 1 ON 121 Reference color R Set Get 0 to 255 122 Reference color G Set Get 0 to 255 123 Reference color B Set Get 0 to 255 124 Upper limit for color difference Set Get 0 to 442 125 Lower limit for color difference Set Get 0 to 442 126 Upper limit for color deviation Set Get 0 to 221 127 Lower limit for color deviation Set Get 0 to 221 128 Reference density average Set Get 0 to 255 129 Reference density deviation Set Get 0 to 127 130 Upper limit for density average Set Get 0 to 255 for monochrome cameras only 131 Lower limit for density average Set Get 0 to 255 for monochrome cameras only 132 Upper limit for density deviation Set Get 0 to 127 for monochrome cameras only 133 Lower limit for density devi
131. asurement and adjust the parameters for the processing items 2 Switch to the AUN window and check to see if there is a problem b Performing Test Measurement Starting Operation Perform measurement in the RUN window b Performing Test Measurement Starting Operation save the measured data and images or analyze the data b Saving Loding Data FZ3 User s Manual Layouts of Screens Windows Screens vary with the status of the operation being performed The structure of some typical screens and the functions for the various buttons are described here Main screen ADJUST window rer Pi H TELIES a To Fj m eR screen for confirming measurement status and for performing adjustment When the power ts first turned on the ADJUST window is displayed after the Language Setling window lo sel the measurement conditions move to the Edit Flow window If there is no problem with the measurement conditions move to the RUN window Edit flow window Window for assembling the measurement flow Flow parts processing tems are displayed on the right side and the measurement flaw scene ts displayed on the left side When the measurement trigger is aclivated processing is execuled in sequence starting from the top of the flow Main screen RUN window Th Dees grou 0 irme j uoneledO aojeg This ts the window for actually starting operation Only information necessary during operation is displayed
132. ate Acquires settings related to image logging SYSDATA OFF Reference Details p 169 Changes settings related to image logging VERGET OFF Acquires system version information Reference Details 0 175 Backup Restore commands Command Abbreviation Function References BKDLOAD OFF Loads System Scene group 0 data Reference Details p 152 BKDSAVE OFF Saves System Scene Group 0 data in a file Reference Details p 153 DATASAVE OFF Saves System Scene group data in the controller s memory Reference Details p 154 IMGSAVE OFF Saves the image data Reference Details p 158 SCNLOAD OFF Loads the Scene data Reference Details p 165 SCNSAVE OFF Saves the Scene data Reference Details p 166 SGRLOAD OFF Loads the scene group data Reference Details p 167 SGRSAVE OFF Saves the scene group data Reference Details p 168 SYSLOAD OFF Loads system data Reference Details p 171 SYSSAVE OFF Saves system data Reference Details p 172 Utility commands Command Abbreviation Function References CLRMEAS OFF Clears all of the measurement values of the current scenes Reference Details p 154 RESET OFF Restart the controller Reference Details p 161 BKDLOAD Reads system scene group 0 data S 91A9 Jeu1ax7 uyim Bugesiunwwon pue Hunosuuo JO SPON gt lt Command format gt BIKIDILJOJA D Se gp mm O lt Response format gt
133. ation Miscellaneous a Waiver No failure or delay by Omron in exercising any right and no course of dealing between Buyer and Omron shall operate as a waiver of rights by Omron b Assignment Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder without Omron s written consent c Law These Terms are governed by the law of the jurisdiction of the home office of the Omron company from which Buyer is purchasing the Products without regard to conflict of law princi ples d Amendment These Terms constitute the entire agreement between Buyer and Omron relating to the Products and no provision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties e Severability If any provi sion hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid such provision shall not invalidate any other provision f Setoff Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice g Definitions As used herein including means including without limitation and Omron Compa nies or similar words mean Omron Corporation and any direct or indirect subsidiary or affiliate thereof Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use 1 Suitability of Use Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyers application or use of the Product At Buyers request Omron will provide applicable thi
134. ation Set Get 0 to 127 for monochrome cameras only Gravity and Area No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Area Get only 0 to 999999999 9999 6 Gravity X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 Gravity Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Reference area Get only 0 to 999999999 9 Reference X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 10 Reference Y Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 101 Output Coordinates Set Get A O 1 Before scroll 102 Calibration Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF 214 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 120 Register the max color hue Set Get 0 to 359 121 Register the min color hue Set Get 0 to 359 122 Register the max color saturation Set Get 0 to 255 123 Register the min color saturation Set Get 0 to 255 124 Register the max color brightness Set Get 0 to 255 125 Register the min color brightness Set Get 0 to 255 126 Extract image Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 427 Background color Set Get 1 White 2 Red 3 Green 4 128 Fill profile Set Get 0 OFF 1 Fill profile 2 Filling up holes 129 Color inv reverse for monochrome Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 132 Reference area Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 133 Reference X Set Get 0 to 99999 134 Reference Y Set Get 0 to 99999 135 Upper limit of the area Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 136 Lower limit of the area Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 137 Upp
135. ation folder name one byte alphanumeric l dataLoggingDirectory saving data logging character FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 169 S 9JA9 Jeu1ax7 y m Bugesiunwwon pue Hunosuuo JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt Example When the image logging setting is acquired when the setting for acquiring the current image logging save condition is 1 Save only for NG error lt Command gt SIYISIDIAITIAL Lloj of g ilnjg iim alg ef Ljo gigli in als lt Response gt OKIE The current image logging save condition is 1 Only NG Changes settings related to image loggin Changes setting related to current image logging lt Command format gt S YISIDIAITIA L o gi gi ilng Setting valus Identifier lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally OlK r When processing is not performed normally IE R Cr lt Parameters explanation gt Setting data Identifier 1 Set value 0 None Image Logging imageLogging 1 Only NG 2 All Folder name of image logging save ee Save destination folder name one byte alphanumeric a imageLoggingDirectory destination character Prefix for image logging file name imageLoggingHeader eee TO Mage a E ge ogging goed alphanumeric characters 0 None Data Logging dataLogging 1 Only NG 2 All Name of destination folder for Save d
136. ations p 271 Output Sequence Measurement results are output in sequence starting with the smallest processing unit No Example When Parallel Judgement Output is processing unit 5 and Parallel Data Output is processing unit 8 OFF BUSY ON Perform Measurement DO LEE Result of Unit 5 Result of Unit 8 Note After measurement the data output by the OR signal or DO signal is held until the next measurement is performed Note that the output state will be maintained even after measurement is complete However when One shot OR signal is on in Reference Setting Communication Specifications Parallel Interface p 178 the OR signal will turn off after the set output time has elapsed The output signal factory default setting is OFF but the signal may be ON for approx 0 5 sec when power is turned on Be careful of signal loading occurring at external devices Timing Chart I O timing for each command is explained here Reference When Output Control Is Set to None p 184 Reference When Output Control Is Set to Handshaking p 186 Reference When Output Control Is Set to Synchronization Output p 187 FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 183 SOOIAGQ JEUJO XJ y m BuljealuNWWO pue BulJOSUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt Reference Scene Scene Group Switch p 189 Reference About multi input function p
137. ature quantity ior Vesreniy 2dees99990009 te 909999990 9999 N Oto7 extraction condition ee TN AU Max OF leature quality IOF extacten Getenne 2eddega999d909 1e 999090909009 N Oto7 condition 25 Nx10 Min of feature quantity for extraction 9999999999999 to 999999999 9999 N Oto7 condition 101 Output Coordinates A ey 1 Before scroll eee 0 OFF 102 Calibration Set Get 4 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get oO oe 1 OFF 120 Max color difference Set Get 0 to 359 121 Min color difference Set Get 0 to 359 122 Max saturation Set Get 0 to 255 123 Min saturation Set Get 0 to 255 124 Max brightness Set Get 0 to 255 125 Min brightness Set Get 0 to 255 0 OFF 126 Extract image Set Get 4 ON 218 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 0 Black for monochrome cameras only Equal 1 White 127 Background color Set Get 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue 129 Reference X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 130 Reference Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 OFF 131 Inverse area Set Get 1 ON illi 0 OFF 132 Filling up holes Set Get 1 ON NNA 0 OFF 133 Outside trimming Set Get 1 ON 137 Label No Set Get 0 to 2499 146 Upper limit of the binary level Set Get 0 to 255 147 Lower limit of the binary level Set Get 128 to 255 l 0 OFF 148 Binary image 1 ON 0 Measurement image l 1 All color image G MAJE ENG 2 Selection color image 3 Binary image 150 Selection of multiple colors Set Get a 152 Label No fo
138. ayed FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 83 uogesado Bulweys juUswWeiNses s BUIWOLIEd v uogesado Buleis juUswWeINses s L Burwood o gt ja Sie wi wing De E lopcing leare j Set the logging images save destination Specify the image file save destination RAMDisk or USB memory Edit the file name as required 2008 10 22 _18 53 57 944 ifz F logging image Tap OK 2008 10 22 _18 53 57 944 ifz FZ logging image After the logging operation is complete the Save Last Logging Image window closes Setting Logging Conditions Logging Setting set the logging timing and the save destination 1 On the Main screen tap the Measure menu Logging setting The Logging Setting window is displayed 2 Set the logging conditions for images Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual Set value Setting item Factory Description default No images are saved None When logging images with the processing item Image Logging select None Image Only NG Only images with an overall judgement of NG are saved Logging All measured images are saved All Note however that some images may not be saved if Measurement is set in Logging priority in step 4 3 Set the logging images save destination L esil inal ion Save to memory C Save to memory file Folder mina TE iiil Prefix In order to perform fast lo
139. before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to Omron within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original trans portation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Products from Omron in the condition claimed Warranties a Exclusive Warranty Omron s exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron or such other period expressed in writing by Omron Omron disclaims all other warranties express or implied b Limitations OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ABOUT NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABIL 14 ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or oth erwise of any intellectual property right c Buyer Remedy Omron s sole obli gation hereunder shall be at Omron s election to i replace in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof the non complying Product ii repair the non complying Product or iii repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the non complying Product provided
140. ble Precise Small Value for Stable Precise Large Value for Skipping angle Large Value for Skippingangle Small Measurement time Short unxp Measurement time Long Measurement precision Low Measurement precision High Correlation value With processing items that use search processing judgement is performed through correlation values Correlation values are used to check the consistency degree of similarity between actual measurement images and reference model images If portions of a measured image are missing or if shapes are 264 Measurement Mechanism FZ3 User s Manual different the correlation value is lower Model image For partial defect For wide line For dark iamge Correlation 54 Correlation 74 Correlation 99 Larger Horizontal Different shapes Correlation 43 Correlation 58 Correlation 58 search Angle Range Skipping Angle These are values based on the model registration image that indicate the allowable rotation interval skipping angle and overall maximum rotation range for the model angle range Search is performed for objects that most resemble these acceptable models Example When angle range is 15 and skipping angle is 5 Registration model Reference A SAAANA g Py Candidate Point Level This is the level used for finding models when searching Images with a correlation value higher than the candidate point level are used to establish candidate points for sea
141. camera TerminologyExplanation 271 Inter camerasetting 106 IPaddress 124 147 LabelData ExternalReference 217 Labeling ExternalReference 216 Labeling ExternalReference 218 Languagesetting 110 LCDOff 24 Line 283 LineRegression ExternalReference 238 Logging 82 Loggingimageclearing 90 Loggingimagesaving 100 MAX 297 MEASURE 159 Measuresetting 108 Measurementflow TerminologyExplanation 272 Measurementimageswitching External Reference 198 Measuringprocessingtime 67 Model TerminologyExplanation 273 ModelDictionary ExternalReference 226 Mouse 21 Movingfiles 101 Multiinput 190 Multipleselection 49 No ofimageloggingimages 292 Noiselevel 267 Noisewidth 268 Non procedure 122 Non stopadjustment 79 Normalmode 61 NOTsetting 290 Opticaldiagram 250 ORsetting 290 Outputcoordinates 269 Outputformat Non procedure 176 Outputformat Parallel 182 Outputpolarity 179 Panorama ExternalReference 236 ParallelDataOutput ExternalReference 245 Parallelinterface 178 ParallelJudgementOutput ExternalReference 246 Passwordsetting 117 PLCLink 122 123 Polartransformation ExternalReference 237 Polygon 289 PositionCompensation ExternalReference 231 PositionCompensation T erminology Explanation 271 Positions 70 PreciseDefect ExternalReference 222 Processingitem 35 Processingitem TerminologyExplanation 273 Processingunit TerminologyExplanation 273 RAMDisk 94 Reading 103 Readingdata 103 Rectangle 282 Referenceposition Terminol
142. cations and describes the I O format for communication with external devices via serial interface RS 232C 422 connection using a free method with commands Communication Processing Flow Non procedure This section explains the processing flow of serial non procedure communication 1 1 connection Example Input measurement command and acquire the results Controller Input command MEASURE Start to measuret BUSY signal of parallel interface is ON during Measurement Output Procitem results Receive Procitem results When Flow Control is setto Aon Mot fa PG has no response within preset overtime line breakage or PG malfunction maybe occur signalling an overtime error Error message will displayed in the window of controller and ERR signal of parallel interface is ON setting Communication Specifications Ethernet Non procedure Communication specifications such as communication speed and IP addresses are set for Ethernet communication Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 Non procedure p 147 FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 145 SOOINAQ JEUO XJ y m BuljealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt S9dIN9 EUA X3 UJIM BuljeolunWWwoy pue Bunoauuo 10 SPON gt EE cc Before setting the communication specifications set the Serial Ethernet communication module to either Normal or Normal F
143. ce table No Processing unit No max 4 digits lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally Measurement value E GR When processing is not performed normally lt Parameters explanation gt Processing unit Specifies the processing unit No 0 to 9999 No External Varies depending on the specified processing unit processing items For details see the reference table External Reference Table of the processing items registered in the processing unit No Reference External Reference Tables p 195 Measurement The acquired measurement value is output as a response Example When the judgement result of Search set as the 6th processing unit processing unit number 5 is acquired external reference table value is 0 lt Command gt UIN TIDA TIA 5 0r FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 173 S 9JA9q Jeu1ax7 y m Bugesiunwwon pue Hunosuuo JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljealuNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt lt Response gt Ofr OJK SR Changing processing unit parameters The set parameters for the processing units set in the scene currently being used are changed lt Command format gt UIN i iTIOAiTA AITAS T S fer L Setting data Extemal reference table No Processing unit No max 4 digits lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally OJK r When processing is not perf
144. contamination of various sizes Upper Lower Detect detection size Defacts i Sensitivity pigh lt og lt gt Handling Coordinates Specify the upper and lower limits of defect detection size based on the size of scratch or The larger the difference between upper and lower limits the easier it is to detect scratches or For both upper and lower limits higher values for defect detection size limits leads to weaker detection sensitivity and shorter processing time The processing items for measuring positions have a setting item called Output parameter with which you can select how to handle coordinates In Output parameter you can set Output coordinates or Calibration Output Coordinates Select coordinate types to be output to external devices Example Measurement image Image with position image without position Image when setting Reference position This angle ip used as modal for position companraation compensation compensation The ares outside of maging range is tuned mio D amp K for left upper deflecton Before position compensation Coordinate values before position compensation are output x a J tot FZ3 User s Manual Measurement Mechanism 269 sexipueddy jo sexipueddy After position compensation with factory settings Coordinate values after position compensation are output Calibration Select whether or not to pe
145. d contents When Ref other Scene s flow is checked the scene select box and other scene flows are displayed g Guide Shows an explanation for the processing item selected in the processing item tree These are used as reference when selecting processing items To display guides check Show guide in e Display options Layout of Property Setting Window This window is used for detailed setting of measurement parameters and judgement conditions for processing items a Item Tab Area Displays the settings items for the processing unit currently being set Perform settings starting with the item on the left b Detail Area Set detailed items C Image Display Area Displays camera images figures and coordinates d Zoom Browser Area Zooms in and out from the displayed image FZ3 User s Manual Layouts of Screens Windows 17 uonejadO aojeg uoneledO aojeg Checking System Configuration This product is a vision sensor for performing image processing measurement through a controller of objects photographed using a camera By connecting an external device such as a PC measurement commands can be input and measurement results can be output from the external device Basic Configuration of FZ3 Series Controller integrated with LCD Box type Controller FZ3 300 FZ3 300 10 FZ3 3507 FZ3 350 10 FZ3 H3500 FZ3 H350 10 FZ3 H300 FZ3 H30D 10 FZ3 7500 FZ3
146. ded by scene and saved FZ3 User s Manual Useful Functions for Operation 85 uogesado Bulweys juUswWeiNses s BUIWUOLIEd v Save to memory file setting example and save destination Example of setting Save destination Folder name USBDisk Saving will be performed as follows for the settings example Prefix image _ on the left Switch saving folder by scene OK image save destination Checked USBDisk SO00 000 OK image_ Measurement ID IFZ Switch saving folder by judge NG error image save destination Checked USBDisk SO00 002 NG image_ Measurement ID IFZ 4 Set the image logging priority conditions This setting is only valid when Save to memory file is selected in the image logging saving conditions When the measurement tact time is short time lag may occur with writing from the controller memory to the RAMDisk or USBDisk and temporary absences of free space in the controller memory may occur Select whether logging or measurement has priority at these times etting priority Lorcing C Measurement Set value Setting item Factory Description default When there is no free capacity in the controller memory subsequent measurement cannot be received until free capacity becomes Logging available All measurement target images are logged but the measurement tact time becomes longer uogesado BulweysjuUswWaINses s BUIWUOLIEd Oo Logging priority Measurement will continue even
147. dge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Number of Edge Pins 0 to 999 6 Average pitch 0 to 99999 9999 7 Max pitch 0 to 99999 9999 8 Min pitch 0 to 99999 9999 9 Average width 0 to 99999 9999 10 Max width 0 to 99999 9999 11 Min width 0 to 99999 9999 101 Output Coordinates A EN 102 Calibration 0 OFF 1 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement 0 ON 1 OFF 120 Edge color R 0 to 255 121 Edge color G 0 to 255 122 Edge color B 0 to 255 123 Edge color difference R 0 to 127 124 Edge color difference G Oto 127 125 Edge color difference B Oto 127 127 Edge Level 0 to 100 128 Noise Level 0 to 442 129 Noise width 0 to 9999 130 Upper limit of edge pitch O to 1000 131 Lower limit of edge pitch 0 to 1000 132 Upper limit of average pitch 0 to 99999 9999 133 Lower limit of average pitch 0 to 99999 9999 134 Upper limit of the pitch 0 to 99999 9999 135 Lower limit of the pitch 0 to 99999 9999 136 Upper limit of average width 0 to 99999 9999 137 Lower limit of Average width 0 to 99999 9999 138 Upper limit of the width 0 to 99999 9999 139 Lower limit of the width 0 to 99999 9999 140 Edge color level 0 to 442 141 Color to count 0 White 1 Black 142 Mode 0 Normal 1 Precise 210 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual scan Edge Position COIN O O HR WI NMI gt a oo rm A CO COIN O O HR Ws NM gt O 101 102 103 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136
148. dically Without stopping a measurement in operation you can change judgement conditions for a processing unit set in a scene Reference Changing Judgement Conditions without Stopping Measurement p 79 Switching to the ADJUST Window 1 Tap Switch to ADJUST mode in the RUN window tool box Tool box Switch to ADJUST mode Enter simplified non stop adj EPEE LCD off gt Switches to the ADJUST window 62 ADJUST Window and RUN Window FZ3 User s Manual Performing Test Measurement Test whether the intended measurement processing can be performed with the current setting contents Look at test results and adjust the property settings of each processing unit Perform measurement according to the conditions set in the displayed scene 1 Display the Main screen ADJUST window 2 For the test conditions on the ADJUST window set the following items i E Edit flow S Data save 23 Scene switch Scene Signal output OFF Through 3 Measure 0 Camera Image Input Setting item Description Place a check here when the measurement results on the ADJUST window are also Output to be output Remove the check when test measurement for the device only is to be performed without results being output Continuous Place a check here when continuous measurement is to be performed meas Tapping the Measure button starts continuous measurement 3 Tap Measure in the Toolbar 0 Scene group 0 g
149. dow Password Password Setting nnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnn 117 Checking System Information System Information eee Pee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee 119 6 Methods for Connecting and Communicating with External Devices veee 121 About Connecting with External DEVICES ssssss s s s s snununnnnunununnnnunununnununununnunununnnnunnnnnn 122 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link nu nnnunuunuunuunuununnuununnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnn 123 Communication Processing Flow PLC Link nu nnunuunnuununuunnununnunnnunnununnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 123 Setting Communication Specifications Ethernet PLC Link srrrrrrrrrrtrrtrrteteeetetetetet ete ee sees 123 Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 PLC Link strrrtrtrretrrrttetet etter ersten eens 126 Memory Allocation PLC Link SECC PP CCPC CCP CCePe CoP Ocoee Cece eee cere cree eee e cree cere ee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 129 Command Control PLC Link ECP PC CCPC CPSC CeCe TOC e eco e eee recor eee e cere errr eee reer rere eee ree ee eee ee ee eee ee ee 131 Data Output PLC Link CCRT CeCe C Cree rece ee ecr rrr errr rrr reer rr rer rere rere rere reer reer eee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee 140 Timing Chart PLC Link PCCP CCP eCCePCCee CeCe creer reece err reer reer rere errr rere reer reer eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee 140 ladder Program Example PLC Link Pete e Cee e Creer eer rece errr errr reer rere r errr err eee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee ee
150. e Tide circle a a Center Position Lt ad L e 4 sexipueddy Center Position t enl ej gt lal gt Radius LI Fidth Arc Image selection status Points are displayed on two lines at both ends of the arcs on the inner arc on the outer arc and inside the closed arc shape Dimension Adjustment Drag the points 286 Setting Figures FZ3 User s Manual Example When enlarging an arc Drag the point inside the arc outward Example When adjusting the width of an arc Drag a point on the inner or outer arc inward or outward Example When changing the angle of arc part that is open Drag one of the points at the end of the arc Using numbers for setting The window for settings is split into three Setting is performed through input of numbers or through tapping on the arrows FZ3 User s Manual Setting Figures 287 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy Start angle ed lt gt Canter Posi t lon T mo Fe End angle wel gt Fide arc Center Position M je gt Radius ee KE Fidth Crosshair Cursor 288 Image selection status Entire image is selected Using numbers for setting Setting is performed through input of numbers or through tapping on the arrows The line type and line color can also be changed at this window Central T ie e siyle solid oo Fidth as gt Color Ok Co
151. e USB memory If there is no USB memory plugged in ER is returned Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response DATE Acquiring date and time Acquires the date and time from the internal calendar timer in the controller lt Command format gt lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally Second Minute Hour Date Month Year When processing is not performed normally lt Parameters explanation gt The acquired date and time are output as a response Year 4 digits VearMontibaer jo A aigis i Date 2 digits Hour Minute Second Hour 2 digits Minute 2 digits Second 2 digits FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 155 S 9JA9q Jeu1ax7 y m Bugesiunwwon pue Hunosuuo JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt Example When the current date and time is 08 30 2007 12 30 00 lt Command gt Setting date and time Changes the date and time of the internal calendar timer in the controller lt Command format gt oa Second Minute Hour Date Month Year lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally OlKI r When processing is not performed normally ER r lt Parameters explanation gt Set the date and time Year 4 digits Year Month Date Hour Month 2 digits Minute Second Date 2 digits Hour 2 digits Minute
152. e bottom position of the scene or another specified position Moving a processing unit E Moreun EE Msasm Moves a processing unit within a scene and changes the processing order Copying and pasting a processing unit w B Pase Copies and pastes a processing unit while maintaining settings data Deleting a processing unit A owe Deletes processing units within a scene Changing the name of a processing unit m Changes the name of a processing units within a scene Editing Processing Units in Scenes FZ3 User s Manual Setting details of a processing unit T Sets the properties of any processing unit in a scene Shift area i sema Changes related figure data in one batch Creating a folder mi ewros Select when multiple processing units are to be managed as one group Operating processing units as a group Used when processing units are copied or deleted together A checkbox is displayed in the processing unit if Multiple selection is tapped Checked processing units can be operated as a group Referring to other scene flows Units of other scenes can be referred to and added to the current scene flow Selecting a scene to refer to displays the flow for that scene Note If a processing unit is inserted the numbers for the subsequent processing units increase by one With processing items related to results output or branch control the numbers for processing units
153. e diagram indicates the Y field of view mm and longitudinal axis indicates WD mm This diagram shows the relationship between the field of view of lenses and the setting distance for different types Make sure to verify the lens type when checking the graph as the field of view value is different for each type Points such as t5 0 on the graph correspond to the thickness of the extension tube used t0 is used if an extension tube is not necessary and t5 0 is used if a 5 mm extension tube is used Lens Types and Outside Diameters screws for filter Max O D 1 32 UNF C mount screw F ull length Lens 3Z4S LE ML series Poc Lens type Brightness Full length Filter size 3Z4S LE ML0614 6mm 30mm M27 P0 5 High resolution and low distortion lens Model FZ LEHx series Goca Lens type Brightness Full length Filter size FZ LEH5 5mm 38 7mm M40 5 P0 5 FZ3 User s Manual About Lenses 253 sexipueddy jo sexipueddy Lens for small digital cameras FZ LESx series Aperture adjustment knob Extension Tube An extension tube which is installed between lens and camera is used to adjust focal distance Different combinations of the 7 tubes can be used to achieve any desired thickness Extension tube J Max O D Thickness mmn 2mm 1mm amp S5mm 030 Extension tubes for small digital cameras FZ LESR Lens extension dimension 0 7 to 2 7 mm rT Aperture adjustment knob Le
154. ection explains the input format for each command used in the serial normal method Commands are input with ASCII code Both lowercase and uppercase letters can be used Scene control command Command Abbreviation Function References Acquires the current scene No SCENE S Reference Details p 161 Switches scene No currently being used Acquires the scene group No currently in use SCNGROUP SG Reference Details 0 163 Switch the scene group No Measurement control Measurement value acquisition commands Command Abbreviation Function References Perform measurement once Reference Details p 159 MEASURE M Start continuous measurement Reference Detalls p 160 Complete continuous measurement Reference Details p 161 SCRSWITCH OFF Switches the ADJUST window RUN window Reference Details p 167 Acquires the parameters and or measurement values of specified UNITDATA UD processing units Reference ela p3 Sets the parameters of specified processing units FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 151 S 9JA9q Jeu1ax7 y m Bugesiunwwon pue Hunosuuo JO SPON gt Settings acquisition change command Command Abbreviation Function References Acquires the current date and time Sets the date time Acquires the current image display status DATE OFF Reference Details p 159 DISPCOND OFF Reference Details p 157 Changes the image display st
155. ed Alow Simpitied nun stop adjustment wa Nel share O Scene o oe 1 Camara naga Input w 1 F il ber ine Bim oad 2 Gamera Switching The window for the judgement conditions of the selected processing unit is displayed If you tap the icon of a processing unit that does not have a Judgement condition setting item a Judgement window is not displayed 4 Change the judgement conditions of each processing unit Faure dhi kidi TEAS s CT ed sitire TI EA RELE Caarch angle 75 0005 Was o Porrelak lan 30000 neH e 5 Tap OK The Judgement window closes and the screen returns to the Main screen The changed contents are shown in the displayed scene When changing judgement conditions for multiple processing units repeat steps Reference 3 p 80 to Reference 5 p 80 6 In the Control area of the Main screen tap Quit simplified non stop adj Tool box Switch to ADJUST mode Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual The simplified non stop adjustment mode ends Note If Switch to ADJUST mode is tapped while executing simplified non stop adjustment the simplified non stop adjustment mode is automatically ended and the screen switches to the ADJUST window Changing Regions as a Batch Shift area Figure data for multiple processing items can be changed as a batch 1 Tap Shift area in the Edit Flow window The Move Measuring Area at Once window
156. ed FZ3 User s Manual 5001 Selected color extraction range Set Get Characteristic application The color extraction range number selected during set up is saved in measurement data When acquiring the data saved in measurement data is returned Anti Color Shading No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 100 Specified color R1 Set Get 0 to 255 101 Specified color G1 Set Get 0 to 255 102 Specified color B1 Set Get 0 to 255 103 Specified color R2 Set Get 0 to 255 104 Specified color G2 Set Get 0 to 255 105 Specified color B2 Set Get 0 to 255 0 Color 1 lt Color 2 106 Direction Set Get 1 Color 1 Color 2 2 Color 1 Color 2 107 Shading level Set Get 0 to 255 l l 0 OFF 108 Filtered image Set Get 1 ON Stripes Removal Filter No Data name Set Get 0 Get only 1 1 0 Judge Transfer source image Data range No judgement unmeasured Judgement result OK Judgement result NG 100 Set Get 0 to 9 number 101 Image number after transfer Set Get 0 to 9 102 Target image Set Get ange eisai 1 Prev unit image 103 Display image Set Get mae Pnr oe 1 Image after processing 0 Light 200 Defect brightness Set Get 1 Dark 2 Light and dark 0 Normal 1 Vertical stripes 201 Background pattern Set Get gt iHonzontalstripes 3 Lattice 202 Background pattern
157. edO aojeg mporent When using a small size digital camera check that the model and serial number of the camera head and camera amplifier match When a camera head and camera amplifier of different models and serial numbers are connected they may not operate correctly PN G Model ol seri Noela a 2 g 8 9 OMRON CAMERA 00015 MADE ERA HEAD FZ SF 0001508 omron CAM Check model and serial No Intelligent Camera with Lighting Function Proper lighting is of crucial importance to vision sensors If an intelligent camera is connected lighting can be controlled from the controller Features of intelligent cameras are as follows A single camera enables testing of illumination from various angles so it is possible to shorten the lighting setting time and test measurement time The controller controls lighting so lighting can be adjusted depending upon the product type Reproducibility of lighting settings is improved Settings can be modified without changing lighting Reference Processing Items List Manual Screen Adjust Settings Camera Image Input p 18 20 Preparing Controllers and Cameras FZ3 User s Manual Input Operations Input operations differ depending on the type of controller Controller integrated with LCD Op
158. ee 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 judgement Lower limit of the 122 l 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 judgement 123 Warning upper limit Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 124 Warning lower limit Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 FZ3 User s Manual Support measurement 241 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy sojqe soudJajoy eu1 x7 Upper limit of the display 125 nce Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 126 site HIF ORMOISPIEY tl Seige 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 127 E Set Get 1 to 1000000 display range l 0 Display 200 results 128 Horizontal Set Get 1 Display 1000 results Image Logging No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Calculation result Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 No judgement unmeasured 6 Judgement result Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 0 None 120 Logging condition Set Get 1 Only NG 2 All epee tl mironeonaens eevee 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 calculation 122 to 123 ea T TT OC ONNOOS ieee 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 calculation Data Logging No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 to Result of Expression 0 l 12 Result or Expression Get only Calculation results of expressions 120 Measurement ID Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 121 Int
159. eee i Dpi manure H G Bech fe Cue A 5 Dipli remah LED alf p E i BESLE TET eer J Figable Search oar Eke Pigg ad ign Esi Edis Width oer mia ety ard Ares Labeling L s ai ge A S ikt E ti a Din tex The selected processing item is appended at the bottom of the unit list flow FZ3 User s Manual Creating a Scene 33 MO 4 JUsLUaINSes sausos Buas 5 Continue to add processing units Repeat the steps after Reference 3 p 33 Note Limitations on settings The number of image input processing items that can be used is limited Reference About Limits on the Number of Image Input Processing Items Used p 293 6 Either tap the icon of the processing unit to be set or tap the Set button Procltem setting button Diam eter bgt El G Seareihy J Fibi Search E a i tonto d ECH Seach i i Be Ciok Gearct i Chaitan Fo Di Position F HH Eis Pact Sean Edga Peidio Sf Scan Edp HA E Cois Dss Fo ety a Wee 7 p Lateh p Labai Dieta Detect MO 4 u wanseapw SoUdDS Huas The property setting window is displayed Set detailed conditions The displayed contents vary depending on the processing item 7 Set conditions The displayed contents vary depending on the processing item Qutout parameter eaturenent condition sub pixel Candidate LY Ti lt gt dultiele output Detail LY Sort s
160. eee eee eee enna e nese ene e naan enaeeeenaas 266 Defect Detection Measurement sittttt ttt eee eee eee ee eee eee e eee ee eee eaaa enna enna 268 Handling Coordinates n unuuununnunnnNNNNNNNNNNSENSENNENSENEENNENSENEENSHNEHNEHNHSENEHNEHNHEHNEHSENNHSENENHEENNENNN 269 Terminology Explanations OCR P CCT eCCreCCreC rere errr reer rere r errr rer rere rere rere reer reer ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee 271 Basic Knowledge about Operations n nnunnuununnunnunnNNENNNENNNNENNENNSENENNENNSENENSEHNEHNENSENNSENENEEENENNN 275 Inputting Values trrsrssssssssssnnenunununnnnunununnununununnununununnununununnununnnunnununununnununnnunnnnnnnnnnnnn 275 Inputting Text rrrrrreseserssnenenenunnununununnununununnununununnununununnunununnnnununununnunununnnnnnnunnnnnunnnnnnn 275 Selecting Files and Folders s ssss s s sssnuunuunnununnnnnnunununnnnununnnnunununnununununnunununnnnunnnnnn 276 Available Operations in Select File WindoW rsrsssssesensnunnununununnununununnununununnunununnunununnnu 278 Using the Zoom Function tsssssssessssssenenununnnnunununnununununnununununnununununnununununnununununnunnnnnn 279 Setting Figures SECRET CCPCCOoSCo COCO SOC T CeCe CeCe eee e eee Seer CeCe eee eee ee eee eee rece reer eee ee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee ee eee ee 281 Layout of Figure Setting Area trrrrrsrrrerssnenennnnnnunununnnnnnununnnnenununnununununnununununnnnunununnunnnnnu 281 Setting Methods rrsssssssssssnsnunununnununununnununununnununununnununununnunun
161. eger Set Get 1 to 10 122 Decimal Set Get 0 0 to 4 4 123 Minus Set Get 0 1 8 124 Field separator Set Get 0 OFF 1 Comma 2 Tab 3 Space 4 CR LF 125 Record separator Set Get 0 OFF 1 Comma 2 Tab 3 Space 4 CR LF 126 O suppress Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 242 Support measurement FZ3 User s Manual Elapsed Time No Data name Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Elapsed Time Get only 0 to 999999 Wait 120 Waiting time Set Get 0 to 9999 ms FZ3 User s Manual Support measurement 243 sojqe soudJajoy eu1 x7 sojqe soudJejJoy eu1 x7 Branch Conditional Branch No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Expression A result Gai Maximum 256 characters result of calculation selected in expression A i Maximum 256 characters result of calculation selected in 6 Expression B result Get expression B i 0 NO T Comparison result 1 YES 8 Destination unit No 0 to 32767 0 A B 1 A lt B 120 Condition type Set Get 2 A lt B 3 A gt B 4 A gt B YES branch 1 End processing sa destination unit No nS 0 to 32767 Unit No NO Destination unit 1 End processing ine No meee 0 to 32767 Unit No DI Branch No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG DI
162. eiINses s L BUIlWJOLIed Oo 1 image 2 images are displayed side by side Suitable for when 2 cameras are connected and images are to be checked all at one time 2 images 68 Arranging the RUN Window FZ3 User s Manual 4 images are viewed together with one each at the left right upper and lower positions 4 images Suitable for when 4 cameras are connected and images are to be checked all at one time Displays four small images at the bottom and also one larger selected image This view is preferable when you wish to check details of a certain image when four Cameras are connected Thumbnail display is not available in the RUN window Fast view mode When using the thumbnail display in the ADJUST window the display will change to 4 images if you switch to the RUN window Fast view mode Thumbnail For the selected image the color of button turns lighter 2 Select which processing unit image to display for each image After tapping the display assignment to change tap the relevant processing unit in the measurement flow Changing Display Contents The display contents of the Image Display area can be changed in order to make the measurement status easier to understand 1 Tap the image to be changed Image No Image No 1 image No 2 image No 3 FZ3 User s Manual Arranging the RUN Window 69 uogesado Bulweys juUswWeiNses s BUIWUOLIEd v uogesado BulweysjuUswWeiNses
163. el 122 Normalization FZ3 User s Manual Set Get 0 No judgement unmeasured Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 0 to 9999 0 to 999999999 9999 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 After scroll 1 Before scroll 0 OFF 1 ON 0 ON 1 OFF 0 OFF 1 ON 0 OFF Set Get 1 ON Data range Measurement 223 sojqe 9Uu 1 J Y eu1 x7 s jqe soudJajoy eu1 X7 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 0 OFF Perturbation Set Get 1 ON Difference Set Get 0 to 255 l 0 Binary Inspection Set Get 1 Labeling Label No Set Get 0 to 2499 0 Area ascending 1 Area descending Sort condition Set Get 2 X ascending 3 X descending 4 Y ascending 5 Y descending Upper limit of label area condition 0 to 999999999 9999 Lower limit of label area condition 0 to 999999999 9999 Upper limit of quantity judgement 0 to 9999 Lower limit of quantity judgement 0 to 9999 Upper limit of area judgement 0 to 999999999 9999 Lower limit of area judgement 0 to 999999999 9999 Upper limit of position X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Lower limit of position X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Upper limit of position Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Lower limit of position Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Character Inspection 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Chara Num
164. ement result NG Get only 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Get only 1 OK 1 NG 0 Unmeasured Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999
165. ence X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 12 Reference Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 13 Reference angle 180 to 180 14 Detected coordinate X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 15 Detected coordinate Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 101 Output Coordinates Sina AN 102 Calibration 0 OFF 1 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement 0 ON 1 OFF 120 Search mode Set Get 0 OFF 121 With rotation Set Get 1 ON 122 Upper limit of the rotation angle 180 to 180 123 Lower limit of the rotation angle 180 to 180 124 Skipping angle 1 to 30 0 OFF 125 Smart mode 1 ON 126 Stab CR 1to15 127 Prec 1to3 128 Stab PT 1to5 129 Reference X 0 to 99999 9999 130 Reference Y 0 to 99999 9999 132 Detection point X 0 to 99999 9999 133 Detection point Y 0 to 99999 9999 i 0 OFF 134 Sub pixel Set Get 1 ON 135 Candidate Point Level Set Get O to 100 136 Upper limit of measure X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 137 Lower limit of measure X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 138 Upper limit of measure Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 139 Lower limit of measure Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 208 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 140 Upper limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 141 Lower limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 142 Upper limit of the corr Set Get O to 100 143 Lower limit of the corr Set Get O to 100 Edge Position No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK
166. enditian 2 Search We 34 Creating a Scene FZ3 User s Manual Processing Item Selection Guidelines Processing items for performing measurement are provided with this product Application oriented measurement can be configured by combining processing items or changing the settings of processing items The method for searching for processing items appropriate to the target measurement is shown here Reference Reference and Purpose p 42 Selecting Measurement Processing Items Using a Chart p 35 Selecting Measurement Processing Items According to the Measurement Method selecting Measurement Processing Items Using a Chart Select processing items appropriate to the target using the chart Item References Performing position campensalot Torobjects Reference Position Compensation p 36 ae Reference Locating Measurement Objects Not Inclined p 37 Maung wie POSOmOroPiecs Reference Locating Measurement Objects Inclined p 38 Reference Internal and External Inspection p 38 Reference Presence Inspection p 39 Inspecting the status of objects Reference Dimension Inspection Measurement p 39 Reference Text Comparison Inspection p 40 Reference Quantity Inspection Measurement p 41 Reference Defect Contamination Inspection p 41 Inspecting for defective products Reference Burr Inspection p 40 Reference Inspection for Presence of Different Objects p 42 FZ3 User
167. er flash memory Note however that if a USB memory device is plugged in scene group data can be saved to the USB memory When Using Scene Group 0 1 On the Main screen tap Data save in the toolbar 0 Scene group 0 0 5cene 0 Signal output OFF Freeze Scene switch Swilch to RUH A confirmation message is displayed Note The same operation is available by tapping Data menu Data save 2 Tap Yes System data and scene group data are saved on the controller s flash memory When Using Scene Groups 1 to 31 1 Plug a USB memory device into the controller 2 On the Main screen tap Data save in the toolbar 4 0 Scene group a E Edit flow ia GEETE switch U S5cene 0 Signal output OFF eee ae Switch to RUN mode Freeze noe A confirmation message is displayed 3 Tap Yes System data is saved to the controller s flash memory and scene group data is saved to the USB memory respectively The data from scene groups 1 to 31 is saved to the USBDisk When multiple USB memories are connected to the controller check in the file explorer window etc that the USB memory where scene group data is to be saved is recognized as the USBDisk Reference About USB Drive Names p 94 96 Saving Settings Data to Controller Memory FZ3 User s Manual Note If a USB memory device is not plugged in a check message is displayed If OK is tapped only system data is saved in the controller
168. er is activated processing is executed in sequence starting from the top of the flow o j himma Lee inp JED Meese Sparh mare Eden Postion F krie Sear Moser beeen Tih ra licr a F ie Loan Edy hith Tahe Tii L abek Ta Dirty ard Arei C Laberg ress Taj Lube Datu E Coed pA Proms ki Sy Fire Hacir ER Sec Peco rarah La fo ieee ry l ap a ah laie bhe paih ip yi mapir ij Ehli B a Unit List Lists the processing units included in the flow You can create a flow for a scene by adding processing items to the unit list b Property Setting Buttons Displays the property setting window where detailed settings can be performed C End Marker Indicates the end of the flow d Edit Flow Buttons Search up Search down FZ3 User s Manual Layouts of Screens Windows 15 uoneledO aojeg Searching can be performed to find out what position a processing item occupies in the unit list The icon for the processing item to be searched for is selected in the processing item tree and clicked This function is convenient when setting long flows Select top Select bottom Selects the processing unit at the top or bottom of the flow 4 Select above Select below Selects the processing unit located one above or one below the currently selected processing unit Rename Displays a window for renaming the selected processing unit Move up Move down Moves the selected processing unit up
169. er limit of gravity X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 138 Lower limit of gravity X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 139 Upper limit of gravity Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 140 Lower limit of gravity Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 141 Upper limit of the binary level Set Get 0 to 255 142 Lower limit of the binary level Set Get 0 to 255 143 Binary image Set Get 0 ON 1 OFF 0 Measurement image MATES acca 7 caren i image 3 Binary image 145 Multiple selections Set Get aie sean ee 160 N x 10 Flag N used for registered color Set Get ROEDER 1 Used 161 N x 10 Flag N for registered color OR NOT Set Get ee 162 N x 10 Register the max color hue N Set Get 0 to 359 163 N x 10 Register the min color hue N Set Get 0 to 359 164 N x 10 Register the max color saturation N Set Get 0 to 255 165 N x 10 Register the min color saturation N Set Get 0 to 255 166 N x 10 Register the max color brightness N Set Get 0 to 255 167 N x 10 Register the min color brightness N Set Get 0 to 255 0 Black 1 White 168 N x 10 Background color N Set Get 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 215 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy Labeling sojqe soudJejJoy eu1 x7 No Data name Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Number of labels Get 0 to 2500 6 Area Get O to 999999999 9999 7 Gravity X Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999
170. er string is displayed display results 0 Black 1 White 124 Character string SeyGet 2 Red sacs 3 Green 4 Blue 125 SN ed Set Get 10 to 100 display size 133 Wide bar size Set Get 4 to 60 0 134 Narrow bar size Set Get 1 5 to 10 0 FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 227 sojqe 9Uu 1 J Y eu1 x7 sojqe soudJejJoy eu1 x7 0 Check digit is not used 136 Check digit Set Get 1 Gheckdigitis used 137 me OL nate cel Nai eat CHAR_NUM_MIN to CHAR_NUM_MAX detected setting ns E 162 PPOrAMIEORNUMESI eaii 0 to CHAR_NUM MAX of characters detected 163 po er MIE E 0 to CHAR_NUM_MAX of characters detected Judgement 164 comparison character Set Get Comparison string used for judgement string Classification 300 to 335 comparison character Set Get Verification string used for classification string 0 Not output 400 Character output flag Set Get 1 Output 0 RS 232C 401 Output device Set Get e ay eer 402 Error output Set Get Error output flag 403 Error message Set Get Message output while outputting an error 2D Codet No 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 103 120 121 Data name Judge Decoded character count Decoded character string Index Integrated quality Contrast Modulation Fixed pattern damage Decode Axis non uniformity Grid non uniformity Correction of error not used Reflect to overall judgement Code type Flag used for special character
171. eration with touch pen BOX type controller Operation with mouse and trackball Operation of Touch Pen With a Controller integrated with LCD perform the following operations when operating the touch screen with the touch pen Tapping Touch screen Lightly touch the screen once with the touch pen and immediately take it off Perform when selecting items etc Drag Draw while pressing on the screen lightly with the touch pen mportcnt Be sure to use the supplied touch pen for touch screen operations Using a pencil or ballpoint pen may damage the touch screen In addition response to operations may be delayed if the screen is tapped continuously and rapidly Basic Operation of Mouse and Trackball With a BOX type controller use a mouse with a USB interface or commercially available trackball See the list for recommended products Please refer to the product catalog Note Do not use the right mouse button scroll wheel or other buttons FZ3 User s Manual Input Operations 21 uoneledO aojeg uoneledO aojeg Click Left button Press the left mouse button once Perform when selecting items etc This document primarily describes operations using the term tapping When using a mouse or trackball read Tapping to mean Clicking Drag Move the mouse by holding down the lefi mouse button Move the mouse with the left mouse button held down 22 Input Operations FZ3 Use
172. estination folder name one byte alphanumeric l dataLoggingDirectory saving data logging character 170 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Example 1 When creating settings so that image logging is only performed during NG errors lt Command gt SIYISIDIADTAL L o dd iInfol ilm age Llolglgli In g ik lt Response gt OJK cr Example 2 When the RAMDisk is set as the image logging save destination lt Command gt slbi Llololsli hlo li m alelelL of el el ilnleld i fr lele tIolr y T TRTA M ID Ti Ts kT lt Response gt OJK r SYSLOAD Reads system data lt Command format gt slylsiL lojalo e ba File name of system data lt Response format gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 y m BuljeoluNWWO pue Hunosuuo JO SPON gt When processing is performed normally O KISR When processing is not performed normally EIR lt Parameters explanation gt Specifies the name of the file to be read with a definite path File name of Only files that are under the following systems and have an INI extension can be read system data USBDisk RAMDisk FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 171 SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt EE cc Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When LABEL INI in the IMG01 fo
173. f a certain thickness and when one point is used to support the paper the point which enables the paper to balance is called the center of gravity The center of gravity of a circular object is the center of the circle the center of gravity of a rectangle is the intersection of two diagonal lines Processing item Single units that constitute measurement processing Scenes measurement flow are created by registering processing items in units Processing unit A unit that constitutes measurement processing Scenes measurement flow are created by setting processing items in processing units Reference Creating a Scene p 33 Correlation value O to 100 are used to represent the degree of similarity with an acceptable object Namely higher values indicate higher degrees of similarity Flow control If the processing speed of the receiving side is slower than that of the sending side when data is being transferred the receiving side will send interruption commands to the sending side or send re admittance commands and then adjust the transmission speed Send data __ Send data buffer is ovartiowed insulficiant processing speed Busy state is notified Data transmision intarrupted Datla processing in buffa menma insufficient buffer capacity ew Busy ralease ps notified send data send data There are two flow control methods Hardware Flow Control and Software Flow Control With this p
174. flash memory FZ3 User s Manual Saving Settings Data to Controller Memory 97 ejyeq Bulpeo7 bulnes gt e1eq Bulpeo7 bulnes gt Saving Settings Data to RAMDisk USB Device Saves the setting data file to the RAM Disk or USB memory The data that can be saved is as follows Data Description System data Settings data such as the System menu settings contents which is shared within the ini controller Scene data Data for each scene Sequence of units set in each scene and setting values of units scn within scenes Scene group data Sgp System Scene group 0 data Data combining the system data and the data from Scene Group 0 bkd The data of scene group with 32 scenes portant During saving do not restart turn off power or remove the USB memory Data will be corrupted and the system will not work properly at the next start up It is especially necessary to pay attention when Save to file is being performed for system scene group 0 data as the data being saved will also be saved to the controller flash memory at the same time Note When Save to file is executed the data to save is also saved in the controller except Scene Group Data 1 to 31 1 When saving to USB memory plug a USB memory device into the controller 2 On the Main screen tap Data Save to file The Save to File window is displayed 3 Tap Setting data and select the data to save Logelng image Cony files
175. fter the processing unit for which time is to be measured O Camera Image input 1 Die hee BEd Foston 2 Execute measurement 3 After tapping the Detail result area tap the elapsed time processing unit where time is to be checked The elapsed time from the top of the flow to the relevant processing unit is displayed FFW lst NG umit Nexi HG unif 3 Sarh 4 Elapsed Tiss _ ox E b Elapsed Tis Selo Detal result f Edee Position 4 Adjust the parameters of the processing units that are taking time For details on adjustment parameters see Key Points for Adjustment for each processing item in the Processing Item List Manual FZ3 User s Manual Key Points for Adjustment 67 uogesado Bulwels juUswWeiNses s L BUIWUOLIEd v Displaying Multiple Windows Together Multiple images can be displayed side by side in the Image Display area 1 In Image display of the Main screen Control area tap of the Image layout menu and select the number of images to be displayed The camera image view in the Image Display area switches according to the selected contents lasge layout Active image laate node Freeze Positions C ON OFF Sub image fimage 0 There are the following four image display patterns Item Description Displays 1 image Since images are enlarged this is ideal for checking details uogesado Buleis juUswW
176. g Images during Multiple Image Input p 295 Reference Reference Reference Character Code Table p 296 Upper Limits of Processing Item Parameters p 297 About Memories Usable with FZ Series p 298 249 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy When using a camera single refer to the following tables to prepare the lens and extension tube The lens may vary depending on the size of measurement objects and the camera setting distance i Optical Diagrams 0 3 megapixel digital camera stand alone FZ S O 3Z4S LEML 10035 3Z4S LEML 3519 3Z4S LEML 2514 3Z4S LEML 1614 3Z4S LEML 1214 3Z4S LEML 0813 3Z4S LEML 0614 S NW 7S AN WY DEV Camera placement distance mm 3 10 100 1000 Y view mm 250 About Lenses FZ3 User s Manual 2 megapixel digital camera stand alone FZ S O 2M FZ LEH100 FZ LEH795 FZ LEH50 FZ LEH35 FZ LEH25 LEH12 I LU T N Le SSS WX YA PZ FZ LEH8 FZ LEHS NN o Appendixes Wa i AN IAS A JS a ww oug sip zjuawaovejd BloweD MAAN AA TANT AA ANNA N S O A e a E 2 ETANANATAAANN NAMA SA OW ET S SEANANNAINAAR AA SA AA NS S AAAA ISN ACANA NUU ANN NASA N AA wi AN i Y view mm 3Z4S LE ML EXR canno
177. g Logging Dat ie 88 Clearing Measurement Results sss nssunununnununununnununununnununununnunununuunnnununnnnunnnnnu 90 Clearing Saved Images u nsunnuununnunnuNNNNSNNENNSNNENNENNSENENNENNSHNENSENNSENENHSHNNSHNENEHNNENHSHNEHHNENNENEENNN 90 Capturing Screens n n unuunnunnunnnnnNNSNNNNNSNNSENSENSENEENSENEHNEHNSHNENHSENNSHNENHSENHSHNENHSHNHEHNENZENHENHSENEENNN 91 4 Saving Loading Data eeeeeeeeeeeretreeetettetttttttttetetetetttettttnttettnttenenentntntnentntntntnennt 93 Basic Knowledge about Data Saving nu nuunuunnunnunuunnnuuunuununnunnuunnnnuununnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 94 About Saving AreaS rrrrrrrrrssrssnnnenunununnununununnununununnununununnununununnunnnunnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 94 About USB Drive NameS sssssssssssssnnnnunununnununununnununununnunununnnnununnnnnnununnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnu 94 Saving Settings Data to Controller Memory u nnunnunnunnuunuununnunnuunuununnuununnunnuunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnn 96 When Using Scene Group Q rrrrsssssnsnennnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnn 96 When Using Scene Groups 1 tO B MECC 96 Saving Settings Data to RAMDisk USB Devjce Were 98 Saving Logging Images to RAMDisk USB Device ree 100 Copying Moving Files rrrrsrereressesenununnnnununununnununununnunununnnnunununnnnunununnnnunununnnnunununnnnununnnnn 101 Loading Settings Data to Controller n n unnunnunnunnunNNNNNNNNNNNNENNENNSNNENNENNSENEHNHHNSENENHSENNNENENEENNENNN 103 5 Changing the system En
178. g on the controller type USB memory devices are recognized and named using the following sequence Controller integrated with LCD 1 Left side of the front 2 Right side of the front 3 Front of the side face 4 Back of the side face Box type Controller 1 Lower left of the front 2 Lower right of the front 3 Upper left of the front 4 Upper right of the front 94 Basic Knowledge about Data Saving FZ3 User s Manual mportant When the BOX controller is used lf USB memory devices are separately connected to adjacent USB interfaces the contact between USB memory devices may possibly lead to failure or damage FZ3 User s Manual Basic Knowledge about Data Saving 95 ejyeq Bulpeo7 bulaes gt e1eq Bulpeo7 bulnes gt Saving Settings Data to Controller Memory Saves system data and scene group data on the controller s flash memory Make sure to save settings data when settings have been changed EES ccc If Save to file is performed for system scene group 0 data the data being saved will also be saved to the controller flash memory at the same time Do not turn off the power during processing The controller may not start up properly the next time it is turned on During data transfer to USB memory do not remove the USB memory device until transfer is completed Data and or the USB memory may be corrupted Note When using scene groups 1 to 31 only system data can be saved in the controll
179. g parallel continuous measurement and when the STEP signal is input continuously do not perform switching of the scene group When this is performed set Unchecked in Save scene group on switch scene in either of the settings items below Switch Scene Group window Reference Switching Scene Groups p 50 Measure setting in the Measure menu Reference Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement p 108 Continuous measurement ESE Measurement is given priority when continuous measurement is being performed As a result the measurement results overall judgment image judgment for each processing unit in the flow display detailed results may not be updated When continuous measurement ends the measurement results of the final measurement are displayed FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 185 SOOINAQ Jeu1axg y m BuljeoluNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt Example When 1 expressions are set in Parallel Data Output Start Measurement Exit Measurement Perform Perform Perform pao Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement OR Final Final Baal A judgmenf judgment judgment DO OFF GATE ON MPS moe Rising time Output time Output period oe Total output time Output period X number of output data Note The output signal functions the same as when Output Control is
180. g systems Be sure to attach an SGP Jedina extension to the file name USBDisk RAMDisk If the specified file name already exists this existing file will be overwritten Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response 168 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Example When data stored in scene group 3 is saved with the file name LABEL SGP in the IMG01 folder in the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned lt Command gt SIGIRIS AIVIE 13 USBDisk2 2 IMGO1 LABEL SGP lt Response gt OJK R SYSDATA Acquires settings related to image logging Acquires settings related to current image logging lt Command format gt SIYISIDIAITIA Llo gig ilnjg r L identifier lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally Measurement value E O KI Sr When processing is not performed normally lt Parameters explanation gt Setting data Identifier 1 Set value 0 None Image Logging imageLogging 1 Only NG 2 All Folder name of image logging save Save destination folder name one byte alphanumeric ae imageLoggingDirectory destination character Prefix for image logging file name imageLoggingHeader Te ONMAGA ooo e mame One aye eevee oe alphanumeric characters 0 None Data Logging dataLogging 1 Only NG 2 All Name of destination folder for eae Save destin
181. gging image files are first saved in the controller memory Note however that the controller memory for saving images is a ring memory If the maximum number of save images is reached images will be overwritten starting with the oldest saved image if further images are saved Reference About Number of Logging Images p 292 Also the controller memory is cleared if the power is turned off To keep images select Save to memory file and save images to USB memory etc ae Set value T Setting item macon deia Description Save to memory Saves to the controller memory Destination Images saved to the controller memory are saved to a a a USBDisk or RAMDisk as files When Save to memory file in Destination is selected set the destination and file names a Set value coe Setting item Eao deia Description Specify the image file save destination RAMDisk or USB RAMDisk Saa Folder name USBDisk memory Logging images are saved in the specified save destination folder Set the prefix for the save file name Prefix The set character string is added at the beginning of the name of the save file Switch If checked folders that correspond to scene numbers are Checked E saving folder automatically created and image files are divided by scene Unchecked by scene and saved Switch l Checked If checked OK NG folders are automatically created and saving folder i as Byiae Unchecked image files are divi
182. group 1 The cause of the failure to switch or to save when switching may be that the USB disk was removed from the controller Connect a USB disk to the controller and try again Confirm that a USB disk is connected to the controller and try again Check the following points Did you remove the USB disk from the controller after selecting a file files on the USB disk Did you delete the selected file For example did you select a file on the RAM disk which was then deleted via FTP In addition the selected file may be corrupt Switch off controller verify the following contents and then restart Is cable connected correctly Does it comply with communication specifications of external devices Are external devices functioning normally If error is not resolved after confirmation the controller may be damaged Please contact one of our branches or regional offices Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 PLC Link p 126 Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 Non procedure p 147 Please verify range for setting and perform setting again Please confirm that characters such as lt gt amp SPC space are not included in the filename Check the following points Is the memory of the save destination sufficient For cases where the save destination is the USB disk is the USB disk connected to the controller Or the controller may not have detected the USB disk Switc
183. h off controller and verify if fan is affected If error information is still shown after restart the controller may be damaged Please contact one of our branches or regional offices A camera not covered by the guarantee is connected to the controller currently being used Destination folder is not found Please check Cannot perform model registration FZ3 User s Manual Check the following points Have you deleted the destination folder For cases where the save destination is the USB disk is the USB disk connected to the controller Or has the USB disk been detected For searching classification and flexible searching Use high contrast images for model registration For fine matching For fine matching 2 pixels at the edges of the image cannot be registered with the model Error Messages and Troubleshooting 257 sexipueddy joo There are restrictions as to what can be set based on the camera and processing items being used Please adjust the region size so that the region is not too large Region size Processing Item Region kind Region size pixels exceeds Please Measurement region 5003712 narrow region Shape Searcht Model region 995328 Barcode Measurement region 1920000 2D Codet Measurement region 1920000 Image logging failed due to insufficient memory at the save destination The error message disappears after 10 seconds Please delete unneeded files in the save destination or prepare a new USB di
184. he input status can be checked with Confirmation Reference Checking Communication Status Non procedure p 149 When data is output via serial communication output is suspended while communication specifications are being set 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Communication Serial RS 232C 422 The Serial window is displayed 2 Tap Setting to set communication specifications Conf i reat ion Hode i Interface Baud rata bes Data length bit Paridy Stop bit bit Flow control Delimiter Timeout a S 9JA9d Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljealuNWWOD pue Bunoauuo JO SPON gt JE Carcel Item Stile Description Factory default P RS 232C RS 422 2400 4800 9600 19200 Adjust to the PC communication specifications 38400 57600 115200 Interface Adjust to the PC communication specifications Baud rate bps Note 1 148 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Data length 7 bit 8 gt None Parity Odd Adjust to the PC communication specifications Even Stop bit bi iz Flow control is not performed with software If the time in which there is no response from external devices None reaches the timeout setting time a timeout error occurs and an error message is displayed in the window The parallel Flow control interface ERROR signal also turns on
185. he selected magnification factor Setting Methods Rectangle Image selection status Points are displayed at each of the four corners Dimension Adjustment Drag the points Example When enlarging Drag the lower right point down in a diagonal direction BE Se SS l Using numbers for setting The window for settings is split into two Setting is performed through input of numbers or through tapping on the arrows 282 Setting Figures FZ3 User s Manual Rectancle Rectangle it Upper left position t e le t Lower right position T ad el el L Center Position t ad le e Line Image selection status Points are displayed at the starting point ending point and midpoint of lines Dimension Adjustment Drag the points KA Example When changing the length of a line Drag the points toward the intended direction n a ET O Example When changing the oblique direction Drag a point in the direction the line is to be changed Example When changing the line width Drag the center point of the line in a direction perpendicular to the line Using numbers for setting The window for settings is split into two Setting is performed through input of numbers or through tapping on the arrows FZ3 User s Manual Setting Figures 283 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy Vide line Start Foint T Center Position T LJ ej e a Fidth lt
186. igures This section describes the setting method for objects figures and text when registering models or specifying measurement regions The type and number of objects varies depending on different setting options Layout of Figure Setting Area tel cerseeler Search ij dv Ecis bor brace rante Shiselan amilo I Ficure Hele ii sence 1 Capia LED ol a Figures Displays a list of names of objects that have been set The figure at the bottom of the list is the nearest object in the foreground The higher the sequence position of the object the further back in the background it is When objects are drawn overlapping the settings for the object set last are valid b Edit Used to edit a figure The following figure editing tool is displayed sel engia Ubber fet pos FZ3 User s Manual Setting Figures 281 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy 1 Drawing tool buttons Sets objects such as figures and text The number and type of objects available is different depending on the applicable setting ex Result display Model Region setting 2 Object editing buttons Buttons for editing objects 3 Details Shows the details of the selected figure Specify the object coordinates or radius Tapping or will display the items currently not displayed C Zoom Browser Area Magnifies the Image Display area by t
187. imit If the measurement value is within the alarm range the Warning message is shown on the screen If a result output related processing item is used this allows for output to external devices when a warning occurs Through trend monitor judgement trends can be managed and NG error images can be saved To save only NG error images identified by trend monitor judgement create settings so that overall judgements from processing units other than Trend Monitor are not included in judgement Logging Measurement Values and Measurement Images Logging is a function for saving camera input images or measurement results when executing measurement There are two different logging methods When logging images that are currently displayed Reference Logging current image Save last logging image p 83 When automatically logging images during measurement Reference Setting Logging Conditions Logging Setting p 84 Images and measurement data can be saved in USB memory which makes them useful for the 82 Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual following kinds of adjustment fi QO SOLE HOTTE TCA NT ECR TAT Optimization of thresholds statistical analysis via Excel Logging Current Image Save Last Logging Image This section explains the method for logging the latest input image being displayed 1 On the Main screen tap Measure Save last logging image The Logging Setting window is displ
188. ing IP address is selected set the IP address subnet mask and the default gateway address Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 10 5 5 100 IP address Input the controller IP address 0 0 0 0 to Subnet mask 255 255 255 255 Input the subnet mask address 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 1 to Default gateway 255 255 255 254 Input the default gateway address 10 5 5 110 a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 DNS server c 0 to 255 Input the DNS server address d 0 to 255 10 5 5 1 Input Output setting Input mode Normal This item cannot be changed Input form ASCII This item cannot be changed a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 Input the output destination IP c 0 to 255 address d 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 65535 Set the port No to use for data I O 9600 with the controller Output IP address Input Output port No 3 Tap OK The settings are confirmed and the Ethernet window closes Communication Example This section introduces methods for outputting logging image files using Internet browsers When actually performing this operation it is necessary to create software for extracting data 1 Input the controller IP address in the Internet browser The controller default IP address 10 5 5 100 is used as an example here The folders within the controller are displayed FZ3 User s M
189. ing Settings Data to Controller FZ3 User s Manual Changing the System Environment FZ3 User s Manual This chapter describes settings related to the controller system environment i Reference Setting Conditions for Camera Use p 106 i Reference Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement p 108 i Reference Setting the System Operation Environment p 110 JUBWUOJIAUQ wazs S y BulbuUeUD o JUBWUOJIAUQ W9a1SAS y BulbuUeUD oO Verify whether or not cameras are connected This section includes no special settings 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Camera Camera connection The Camera Connection window is displayed 2 Verify the connection status 3 Tap Close This creates settings for the delay from when the input trigger STEP signal is received to until the shutter trigger occurs When multiple cameras are used this prevents mutual lighting interference and can be used as a Simple trigger delay when only one camera is used 106 Setting Conditions for Camera Use FZ3 User s Manual Note The STGOUT pulse width is set in Electronic flash setting of the Camera Image Input processing item Reference Processing Item List Manual Electronic Flash Setting p 17 o BH ON Shutter trigger OFF 7 for Camera0 On Delay between STEP Camera 0 Shutter trigger _ _ forCamera1 ON 7 Delay between STEP Camera 1 stcouto OFF 3 ON 3 Delay be
190. input 275 Characterlnspection ExternalReference 224 Circle 284 ECCircleSearch ExternalReference 204 Circleregression ExternalReference 239 ECMSearch ExternalReference 203 CircleAngle ExternalReference 230 Edgedetection 266 Circumference 285 EdgePitch ExternalReference 210 Classification ExternalReference 208 Edgelevel 266 Clearmeasurement 90 EdgePosition ExternalReference 209 Clearingsavedimages 90 Elapsedtime ExternalReference 243 CLRMEAS 154 Ellipse 284 ColorData ExternalReference 213 Encodertriggersetting 115 Colorgrayfilter ExternalReference 233 Ethernet 123 145 Colorprocessing 262 Extensiontube 254 CommandControl PLCLink 131 ExternalReferencetables 195 Commandformat Non procedure 150 ExtractColorFilter ExternalReference 234 Commandformat Parallel 181 F Communicationspecifications Ethernet Non l procedure 145 Fancontrolsetting 111 Fastviewmode 61 FZ3 User s Manual 299 300 Figuresetting 281 Filtering ExternalReference 232 FineMatching ExternalReference 223 Flashmemory 94 FlexibleSearch ExternalReference 200 Flowcontrol TerminologyExplanation 273 FTP 192 GetUnitData ExternalReference 240 GetUnitFigure ExternalReference 240 GravityandArea ExternalReference 214 Gravitycenter TerminologyExplanation 273 HalationCut ExternalReference 236 Handshaking 179 Imagelayout 68 Imagelogging 85 Imagelogging ExternalReference 242 Imagemode 70 IMGSAVE 158 Initialization 23 Inputformat Parallel 181 Intelligent
191. input No Get No used to indicate DI input 00000 to 11111 Unit No Get Unit number at destination corresponding to DI input Destination Unit 120 to No 0 1 End processing 151 Destination Unit S Get 0 to 9999 Unit No No 31 244 Branch FZ3 User s Manual Output result Data Output No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG ASCII 99999999 9999 to cs ae A Get only 999999999 9999 Binary 2147483 648 to 2147483 647 136 Communication method Set Get ee terns 1 RS 232C RS 422 1 Individual specification 137 Output format Set Get 0 ASCII 1 Binary 138 Integer Set Get 1 to 10 139 Decimal Set Get 0 0 to 4 4 140 Minus Set Get 0 1 8 141 Field separator Set Get K ue a a saaee 4 Delimiter 142 Record separator Set Get A an SOM ee TARIANA 4 Delimiter 143 O suppress Set Get 0 OFF 1 ON 144 to Output IP address 1 to 4 only when Ethernet is selected Set Get Output IP address 147 sf for the communication method Output IP address setting 149 only when Ethernet is selected Set Get cp eg all for the communication method Parallel Data Output No 5 to 12 128 Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 1 Judgement result NG Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK Data 0 BCD 999 to 999 Data 7 Get only Data format Set Get 0 Binary 1 BCD FZ3 User s Manual Bi
192. ion specifications such as link areas or communication speed and data length are set Reference Setting Communication Specifications Ethernet PLC Link p 123 portent ccc Before setting the communication specifications set the Serial RS 232C 422 communication module to PLC link SYSMAC CS CJ CP One store to the controller then restart the system Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 112 Use the same communication specification settings for the controller and the external device 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Communication Serial RS 232C RS 422 The serial interface window is displayed 126 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual 2 Inthe communication setting area set the following items Setting PLO Link Interface Baud rate bps Data length Ibit Parity Stop bit bid Flow control z Timeout s Hele OK Canga Set value Setting item Tacar Cr Description Interface Saa Adjust to the PLC communication specifications RS 422 2400 4800 9600 Baud rate bps Note 1 19200 Adjust to the PLC communication specifications 38400 57600 115200 Data length bit 4 None Parity Odd Adjust to the PLC communication specifications Even e1 Stop bit bit Flow control is not performed with software If the time in which there is no response from Norel exter
193. is displayed 1 New folder Creates a new folder Toggle list view Reference Switches the display format of the List View area p 278 FZ3 User s Manual Basic Knowledge about Operations 217 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy d List View Area A list of files and folders contained in the folder selected from the folder view area is displayed In addition when an extension name is selected from Kind only the files with the selected extension name are displayed The content displayed is switched if List display toggle is tapped e File Name View Area File name Reference Names of files selected in the List View area p 278 are displayed Kind Reference Specifies the types of the file displayed Scene data System data etc in the List View area p 278 Available Operations in Select File Window This section describes the main operations available from the Select File window Note Ifthe target file is not displayed in the List View area when selecting a file please check that the file type of the target file is selected in Kind Copying Pasting a File or Folder 1 Tap the folder or file that you want to copy in the List View area The file or folder will be selected 2 Tap Copy Ey 3 Select the target folder and tap Paste Renaming a Folder or a File 1 Tap the name of the file or folder to be renamed from the List View area The file or folder will be selected
194. is displayed 3 Select the scene group to delete and tap Clear Eroup crop ETOP group Eroup croup croup Eroup frou rroue ETE croup riche group croup croup group 1 roup 5 Tap Close Renaming a Scene Group Scene groups can be arbitrarily named This is convenient for managing more than one scene group 1 On the Main screen tap Scene Scene maintenance The Scene Maintenance window is displayed 56 Editing Scene Groups FZ3 User s Manual FZ3 User s Manual 2 Set Scene group name group Scene Eroup name i g cene group mer 1 Tap for the Scene group name The soft keyboard is displayed 2 Enter a new name Use 15 characters or less to Input words E griich Edit w te 3 Tap Close Editing Scene Groups 57 MO 4 JUsLUaINSes sauss Buas MO 4 JUsUaJNSes SoUdDS Huas 58 Editing Scene Groups FZ3 User s Manual Performing Test Measurement Starting Operation FZ3 User s Manual This chapter describes tests methods for checking whether correct measurement can be performed at the set conditions and describes useful functions for operation i Reference ADJUST Window and RUN Window p 60 i Reference Performing Test Measurement p 63 i Reference Key Points for Adjustment p 65 i Reference Arranging the RUN Window p 68 i Reference Useful Functions for Operation p 76 59 uogesado B
195. ividing later inspection conditions according to type branch processing Check for defects relative to type 2 f Check for defects relative to type 1 FZ3 User s Manual es hi Matching Display Image ga in Image Foul a 1 Classiication 2 Conditional Branch ies d End Go Te a a fme Matching 6 brd f l a What Is a Scene 31 MO 4 JUsLUaINSes sauss Buas MO 4 JUsLUaINSes sauss Buas A scene group refers to a grouping of 32 individual scenes Creating a scene group is convenient when increasing the number of scenes and when managing a number of scenes according to category USB memory is required for creating a scene group Scene group 0 is saved in the controller while scene groups 1 to 31 are saved in USB memory Edit Scene Edit Scene Group f Scene Group 2 Scene Group 1 Scene 0 omo ocene 2 Uta scene 1 unit2 ocene 0 scene Group 0 USB memory SDE L Controller Scene group 0 To be saved into built in flash memory Scene group 1 to 31 To be saved into USB memory Note The maximum number of scenes that can be used is 1024 32 scenes are handled as 1 scene group and up to 32 scene groups can be set In other words 32 scenes x 32 scene groups 1024 scenes which is the maximum number that can be used There are multiple USB ports on the controller but it is necessary to assign the drive na
196. ixes E eee eer ei oe ee ee eT eee ee eo eee 249 About LENSES rsssssssssssssusununnnnunununnnnunununnununununnununununnununnuunnununununnunununnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnn 250 Error Messages and Troubleshooting nu n unuuununnunnnnnNNSNNNNNSNNNENNENENNENNSENSENENNSENENNENNENNENEENNENNN 256 FAQ n uunuununnuunnNNNNNNNNNNSENSENNNNSNNSENNENSENSENEHNSHNEHNSHNSENEHNHSENEHNEHNHSHNEHSEHNHSENEHHENHSENEHHENHHHNENEHNNENNN 259 During Start up SECC PCCCT OCC PCCeCCCO LoCo CeCe eee eee e eee eee eee Tee Cree eee ee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee ee ee eee ee eee eee ee ee 259 During Operation SeCCe reer rere rrrrrerr reer errr errr errr errr reer rer rr errr rrr reer errr reer reer re eee eee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee 259 For Measurement circ t ttt tee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee e eee enna ea eee eee eee eeae ee eaaaee naan enaaaeee 260 About Parallel Interface Pete P CCT eCCreCrrrecr reer errr rrr errr rrr rr rer rere rrr rr errr rer reer eee ee eee eee eee ee ee eee ee 260 About Serial Interface RS 232C 422 Connection PCr Peete cere err errr errr rere rere ee eee ee eee eee eee eee 261 Measurement Mechanism crtcctttt ttt cree cree eee e eee n nese nena ee nee eee e eae e nae naaaaeeaaaeeenaaernaaaaenas 262 Color Processing Mechanism rrssssssesessnnnnenunununnunununnnnununununnunununnnnunununnnnunununnnnnnunnnnn 262 Search Processing Mechanism rrrsrsssssssessnnnnnnununnnnnnununnnnnnununnunnnununnnnunununnununununnunnnnnn 262 Edge Detection MECAaSUPEMeNt tt ttt eee eee
197. judgement 228 Measurement Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Number of characters included in code Get only detected Get only Character string included in code detected 0 to INDEX _NUM_ MAX 1 1 Where there was no match with any of Get only the index comparison strings or the index comparison string has not been set up Get only 0to4 Get only 0 to 4 Get only 0 to 4 Get only 0 to 4 Get only 0 to 4 Get only 0 to 4 Get only 0 to 4 Get only 0 to 4 0 ON Set Get 1 OFF 0 Data Matrix ECC 200 meee 1 QRcode 0 are considered to be wild cards Set Get 1 are considered to be character strings FZ3 User s Manual Flag used for special character 0 are considered to be wild cards 122 ec ih Set Get 1 are considered to be character classification strings 123 Flag showing character string display Set Get 0 Not displayed results 1 Displayed 0 Black 1 White 124 Character string display color Set Get 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue 125 Character string display size Set Get 10 to 200 0 Black code 134 Code color setting Set Get 1 White code 170 Upper limit of number of characters Set Get 0 to CHAR NUM MAX detected 171 Lower limit of number of characters Set Get 0 to CHAR NUM MAX detected 172 Judgement comparison character string Set Get Comparison string used for judgement 173 Lower limit of overall quality Set
198. judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 123 Lower limit 1 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 124 Upper limit 2 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 125 Lower limit 2 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 126 Upper limit 3 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 127 Lower limit 3 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 128 Upper limit 4 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 129 Lower limit 4 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 130 Upper limit 5 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 131 Lower limit 5 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 132 Upper limit 6 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 133 Lower limit 6 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 134 Upper limit 7 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 135 Lower limit 7 for judgement 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 Line Regression No Data name Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Line Param 0A Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 6 Line Param 0 B Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 Line Param 0 C Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Line Param 1A Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 9 Line Param 1 B Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 10 Line Param 1 C Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 11 Cross point X Get only 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 12 Cross point Y Get only 9999
199. kly If yes the response to operation may be delayed FZ3 User s Manual FAQ 259 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy NG memory shortage is displayed in the Detail result area Does the number of specific processing items such as camera image input exceed the limit Reference About Limits on the Number of Image Input Processing Items Used p 293 In Image display of the Control area Image mode Positions and Sub image can not be changed EE F Detail resul wal Filtering F image iireplay laago layout i image Aclive image Image number 0 lage mods Freeze Positions f QH OFF Sub image Imag a D Is the Detail result area active Reference Displaying Flow and Detailed Results p 73 For Measurement Display is not updated Measurement is given priority when the STEP signal input interval is short or continuous measurement is being performed As a result the measurement results overall judgment image individual judgment in the flow display detailed results may not be updated When continuous measurement ends the measurement results for the final measurement are displayed About Parallel Interface Trigger signal input signal not accepted Are the cables connected correctly Is the signal cable disconnected You can check the communication status in the Confirmation window Reference Checking Communication Status Parallel Interface p 180 Are windows other
200. l Normal Fxxx series method see the note below Serial RS 232C Fxxx series method PLC Link Communication is performed via RS 422 lt PLC Link a link area with the PLC SYSMAC CS CJ CP _ Parallel One Standard Parallel I O Communication is Parallel Standard Parallel 1 0 performed via a standard parallel interface 3 Tap OK Settings are confirmed and the Startup Setting window closes Note About Normal Fxxx series method With the Normal Fxxx series method communication method the OK response timing in relation to MEASURE commands is different from that of the Normal communication method Normal Fxxx series method communication method Normal communication method MEASURE MEASURE Measurement result OK OK Measurement result Setting the RUN Window Display RUN mode View Setting The layout of display contents and size of characters can be set 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller RUN mode view setting The current RUN window mode is displayed To change the mode specify the mode in System Controller Select RUN mode 2 Set items to be displayed Visible Mot Visible 0 Scene Group 0 0 Scene 0 Locate 114 Setting the System Operation Environment FZ3 User s Manual Setting the RUN Window Shortcut Create Shortcut The short cut button can be added to the RUN window The button is added to the tool box 1 On the Main screen ta
201. l registration image and the input image is performed Since measurement is based on shape consistency profile of model positions can be measured accurately even if portions of the model PT are missing in images When the rotation angle range is wide such as full angle a search that is faster than a CR search can be performed Note however that this method may be less reliable than a CR search if the image has low contrast or blurred edges Note Basic selection flow Does Measurement object workpiece o No rotation GR rotate no i Rotation range of esate measurement Rotation PT object workpiece L o All Search Speed For processing items to perform search processing such as Search and Classification you can specify the search processing speed by through the model parameter items Stab Prec and or Skipping angle If the value specified for Stab or Prec is small or if the value for Skipping angle is large the processing speed can be increased since the amount of information for the models will be decreased during the search In contrast if the values specified for Stab or Prec are large or if the value for Skipping angle is small the processing speed is slow because search is performed without the amount of model information being reduced Specify appropriate values for Stab Prec and Skipping angle according to the measurement conditions Value for Sta
202. lder of the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned is loaded lt Command gt SY S LIO AID USBDisk2 IMGO1 LABEL INI lt Response gt O KISr SYSSAVE Saves system data lt Command format gt Save destination lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally O KISR When processing is not performed normally IEIRIfe lt Parameters explanation gt Specifies the save destination and file name during saving with a definite path Save destinations include directories under the following systems Be sure to attach an INI Save 7 destination extension to the file name USBDisk RAMDisk If the specified file name already exists this existing file will be overwritten Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When data stored in scene group 3 is saved with the file name LABEL INI in the IMG01 folder in the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned 172 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual lt Command gt STYISISIAIVIE USBDisk2 IMGO1 LABEL INI lt Response gt OJK R UNITDATA or UD Acquiring processing unit parameters and measurement values The set parameters and measurement values for the processing units set in the scene currently being used are acquired lt Command format gt UIN UTIOLALTIAL I III I I fr Extemal referen
203. led Please check that the controller is switched on and that the Main screen is displayed For details see the User s Manual The first time the program is started up the Language Setting window is displayed so select the language Reference Selecting the Language Language Setting p 110 Adjusting Cameras Confirm what kind of images are being taken Adjust the position of measurement objects and the focus of the lens 1 Tap of Image mode in Image display of the Main screen Control area and select Through The through images captured from the camera are viewed in the Image Display area Reference Changing Display Contents p 69 Note The same operation is available by tapping View Image mode Through 2 Adjust the position of measurement objects so that they display at the center of the monitor Adjust the positions of objects to be measurement 3 Adjust the focal distance of the lens When using an auto focus camera or an intelligent camera focus and the iris can be automatically adjusted Note lf a camera is used together with a lens turn the focus ring of the lens to adjust the focus Reference Processing Item List Manual Lens Setting p 21 The light intensity of an intelligent camera can be adjusted from the controller Reference Processing Item List Manual Lighting Control p 18 FZ3 User s Manual Preparing Controllers and Cameras 19 uonejJadO aojeg uonel
204. long distance Max Set Get 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX 150 Upper limit of the short distance Max Set Get 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX 151 Lower limit of the short distance Max Set Get 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX 152 Upper limit of the deviation Set Get 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX 153 Lower limit of the deviation Set Get 0 to dist X_MAX Y_MAX 154 Upper limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 155 Lower limit of the angle Set Get 180 to 180 156 Upper limit of the lost point Set Get O to 100 157 Lower limit of the lost point Set Get O to 100 158 Monochrome edge detection mode Set Get a F Te 159 Edge level absolute value 0 to 442 eas 0 160 Edge level specification method ie Abeac valie 162 Scan lines 1 to 100 163 Scan width 1 to 200 164 Display area 0 to 99 l 0 OFF 165 Noise cancel 1 ON 166 Measure type Set Get 0 Projection 1 Derivation ier Area dvision metos eda ae dist X_MAX Y_MAX sqrt X_MAX X_MAX Y_MAX Y_MAX scan Edge Width BREW N gt 212 No Data name Judge Edge width Max Edge width Min Edge width Ave Lostwidth Measurement Set Get Get only Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 0 to dist X_ MAX Y_MAX 0 to dist X_ MAX Y_MAX 0 to dist X_ MAX Y_MAX 0 to 100 FZ3 User s Manual 101 Output Coordinates Set Get 102 Calibration 103 Reflect to overall judgement 120 Edge color specification 121 Edge color R 122 Edge color
205. lor Setting Figures FZ3 User s Manual Polygons Triangle to Decagon Drawing methods for drawing a quadrilateral gt 4 gt 1 When Polygon is specified a triangle is drawn at first 2 If you drag and drop one of the sides at the point you want to make a new vertex a new vertex will be created If the number of vertexes is not within 3 to 10 the image cannot be confirmed as a polygon Image selection status Points are displayed at the vertexes of the figure Dimension Adjustment Drag the points Example When changing the angle of one point Drag point arbitrarily Example When changing the region Drag point arbitrarily Using numbers for setting The window for settings is split into two Setting is performed through input of numbers or through tapping on the arrows FZ3 User s Manual Setting Figures 289 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy Center Position t stl 240 gt 4 Text Image selection status po oaa Entire image is selected Note Text can only be used in the Result display processing item Time Image selection status p OFFOF 12512112 E __ Entire image is selected Note Time can only be used in the Result display processing item About OR Setting NOT Setting The OR setting NOT setting is used when multiple images are combined Areas with complex shapes can be drawn through combining figures
206. me USBDisk to the USB memory in which the data for the scene group being used is stored When other USB memory devices are already inserted perform this operation after removing all USB memory devices other than the one in which the scene group data is stored If the USB memory capacity is insufficient for the data size the number of scenes it is possible to set can be set lower than 1024 The scene data size varies depending on the contents of settings The data size that can be set data memory capacity can be checked in the system menu Reference Checking System Information System Information p 119 32 What Is a Scene Group FZ3 User s Manual Creating a Scene This section explains methods for adding a new processing unit to a scene 1 Display the scene to edit on the Main screen Reference Switching Scenes and Scene Groups p 50 2 Tap Edit flow in Toolbar 0 Scene group Signal output OF Freeze The Edit Flow window is displayed 3 Select a processing item to be added from the processing item tree Dema ie idii Feu a aE Fin ble Seach zie Gma r ECH Damrth ae Ec ance ap ah zie 4 Ar Cindi Eo Edge foii Hi dee Pach E Sora Es Foie Sf r Ei W A Cii Di 7 Gravy and Area z N Pa 3 larg j Labsi Deia Dia Precio artes Tp hates Fria 1s i fag Dm Verene Lal Modal fiche T Grr Anal m 2 Went zee J Q Genpercate m
207. me shaped light can also be controlled with the controller This is beneficial when the effects of ambient light are to be avoided and when it is desirable to shorten the lighting setting time For details see Reference Intelligent Camera with Lighting Function p 20 Reference position The point that is always the reference If the location of the registered model is different from the reference position the setting should be changed in Ref position FZ3 User s Manual Terminology Explanations 271 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy Calibration This refers to conversion of measured pixel unit dimensions to actual dimensions Setting the relationship between actual coordinates and camera coordinates enables conversion of measurement results in pixel units to actual dimensions To output measured values converted by calibration to external devices set Calibration in Output parameter of each unit to ON For example in the case of an object that measures 20 mm wide and has a 200 pixel width in the measured image calibration is performed as follows 20 mm 200 pixel 0 1 mm pixel In other words 1 pixel pix in the camera coordinates corresponds to 0 1 mm in actual size Screen gt i pixels Measurement flow A measurement processing series is called a measurement flow You can combine processing items to create measurement flows Detection point This is the point that specifies the coordina
208. ment Results Clears all of the currently displayed scenes This function sets the expression which calculates the measurement count and is convenient when that count is to be reset 1 On the Main screen tap Measure Clear measurement A confirmation window is displayed 2 Tap OK ar Tere meen Clear data hE Cancel The measurement results are deleted Clearing Saved Images Clears all of the logging images that are currently logged in the controller 1 On the Main screen tap the Measure menu Clear logging image A confirmation window is displayed 2 Tap OK 90 Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual Note If you want to keep the logged images as files save the logged images to the USB memory device by tapping Data Save to file Logging image before clearing them Reference Saving Logging Images to RAMDisk USB Device p 100 Capturing Screens The contents displayed in the monitor screen can be captured Saved images can be loaded into the PC and pasted to documents mportcnt Capture takes a few seconds and measurement cannot be performed at this time 1 Open the measurement manager bar at the bottom right of the Main screen and tap Capture Image viw setting mage layout f image AcLive image Image number 0 mage mode Freee F Positions CON i OFF Sub aaga image g The same operation can also be performed
209. ment precision and shorten measurement time Stabilizing Measurement This section describes key points for adjustment when measurement is not stable There are two methods for improving measurement precision Performing processing of images loaded from the camera filtering or adjusting settings and parameters Adjusting Parameters of Each Processing Item Adjustment to improve precision and stability varies depending on the processing item For details see Key Points for Adjustment for each processing item in the Processing Item List Manual Processing Images Filtering There are cases in which high precision measurement is impossible such as when using images loaded from the camera that have noise irregularities or low contrast or when the background has patterns during defect measurement In this case measurement accuracy can be improved by performing processing of measurement images in advance Reference Processing Item List Manual Filtering p 290 When measurement images have irregularities Search and location positioning are not stable The filtering items Smoothing strong and weak and Median are both effective Smoothing strong and weak This processing changes the shade of images so that irregularities are not as easily seen Weak smoothing Before filtering After filtering Median In comparison with smoothing Median allows for irregularities to be hidden without having to shade the edges
210. mmunication Non procedure 161 SOOINAQ Jeu1axg y m BuljeoluNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt lt Command format gt SICJEIN E Or lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally Scene No max 2 digits When processing is not performed normally E R Cr lt Parameters explanation gt Scene No The acquired scene No currently used scene No is output as a response 0 to 31 Example When scene 0 is being used lt Command gt SICIEINIE fr lt Response gt Scene switch No Switches the scene No to be used lt Command format gt ocene No max 2 digits lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally OlKISR 162 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual When processing is not performed normally lt Parameters explanation gt Scene No Specifies the scene No after switching 0 to 31 Example When switching to scene 2 lt Command gt lt Response gt OJK SR SCNGROUP or SG Acquires scene group No Acquires the current scene group No lt Command format gt or SIGIFr lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally fe Scene group No max 2 digits When processing is not performed normally lt Parameters explanation gt Scene group No The acquired
211. munication 179 SOOIAGQ JEUO XJ y m BuljeoluNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt Checking Communication Status Parallel Interface Check the communication status with the external devices connected with a parallel interface You can check whether wiring and communication settings have been performed correctly 1 On the Main screen tap System Communication Parallel The Parallel window is displayed 2 Tap Confirmation to check the I O status Piss lhe set t ing Input slate n EENET SEF I KSAT ON Description STEPO STEP l ae The input status of each signal from the external device to the controller is displayed DSAO DSA1 When a signal is input the background color becomes red DI RUN GATEO GATE1 The output status of each signal is displayed BUSY When a signal is output the background color becomes red ORO OR1 The output status from each signal of the controller to external devices can be ERR specified __________j Changes between ON and OFF and between 0 and 1 can be simulated without READY performing measurement READY 1 DO That status of each of the parallel terminal signals STEP DSA GATE OR and READY can be checked on the screen with STEPO DSAO GATEO ORO and READYO SOOINAQ jeu1ax3 uyim BuljealuNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt 180 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual 3 Change the contents
212. n number is upper limit odd number is lower limit 148 to 163 Lower linte condilion Exp upper and lower limits for inclusion processing unit calculation M Set Get 0 M 0 to 15 164 to 171 Condition comment M Set Get Exp comment character string for inclusion processing M 0 to 15 unit O Data exp M Exp character string for inclusion processing unit 1 LOO Mn Oiler SeHGRI 2 First half is 1 second half is 2 Upper limit for data calculation M Set Get M 0 to 15 Even number is upper limit odd number is lower limit 196 to 227 Lewer link tordai Exp upper and lower limits for inclusion processing unit saleualonM Set Get 1 2 First half is 1 second half is 2 M 0 to 15 Data comment M Exp comment character string for inclusion processing 22 24 Steta M0 to 45 ii unit 1 2 First half is 1 second half is 2 500 to 515 penis l o l Set Get 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 248 Display result FZ3 User s Manual Appendixes FZ3 User s Manual Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference About Lenses p 250 Error Messages and Troubleshooting p 256 FAQ p 259 Measurement Mechanism p 262 Terminology Explanations p 271 Basic Knowledge about Operations p 275 Setting Figures p 281 About Number of Logging Images p 292 i Reference About Limits on the Number of Image Input Processing Items Used p 293 i Reference About Max Number of Loadin
213. nal devices reaches the timeout setting time a timeout error occurs and an error message is Bion contol displayed in the window The parallel interface ERROR signal also turns on Flow control is performed with software Data is Xon Xoff sent according to the Xon Xoff codes from FZ3 User s Manual external devices Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 127 SOOIAGQ JEUO XJ y m BuljeoluNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt 1 to 120 Set the time in which a timeout error will occur in Timeout s 5 seconds Note 1 If a speed of 38400 bps or higher is selected effective communication cannot be guaranteed depending on the cable length because speeds of over 20 kbps are not defined in RS 232C standards In these cases set the communication speed at 19200 bps or lower 3 Tap PLC Link The PLC Link Setting window is displayed 4 Set the following items Setting Command area Area C10 Ares CIO sw Addrere o y Responte area Aree CIO ArealCId Address 100 Data Quiput arsa Area i ero Area Clo Address TT baal Retry interval es 1oo00 f 5 Help OK Cancel Set value eae D T Setting item Factory cern escription Command area CIO Area CIO Work Area WR Area Holding Bit Area HR Set the communication Auxiliary Bit Area AR area DM Area DM EM Area EMO 0
214. nary 32768 to 32768 Output result 245 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy sojqe soudJejJoy eu1 x7 Parallel Judgement Output 5 to 20 21 to 36 103 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 246 No Data name Judge Data 0 Data 15 Judge 0 Judge 15 Reflect to overall judgement Upper limit O for judgement Lower limit O for judgement Upper limit 1 for judgement Lower limit 1 for judgement Upper limit 2 for judgement Lower limit 2 for judgement Upper limit 3 for judgement Lower limit 3 for judgement Upper limit 4 for judgement Lower limit 4 for judgement Upper limit 5 for judgement Lower limit 5 for judgement Upper limit 6 for judgement Lower limit 6 for judgement Upper limit 7 for judgement Lower limit 7 for judgement Upper limit 8 for judgement Lower limit 8 for judgement Upper limit 9 for judgement Lower limit 9 for judgement Upper limit 10 for judgement Lower limit 10 for judgement Upper limit 11 for judgement Lower limit 11 for judgement Upper limit 12 for judgement Lower limit 12 for judgement Upper limit 13 for judgement Lower limit 13 for judgement Upper limit 14 for judgement Lower limit 14 for judgement Upper limit 15 for judgement Lower limit 15 for judgement Output result Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judg
215. nd EL Daceunion top channel code 15 12 7 4 3 0 k 2 2010 0010 0000 0001 0000 Setcommand 3 0010 0000 0000 0001 0000 codes Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area Description top channel 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 2 0010 0000 0001 0000 Command cod 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Saving in Controller Stores the current system data and scene group in the controller FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 133 SOOINAQ JEUJO XJ y m Bugeoiunwwon pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt Command PLC to Controller Command area Command EL Descioion top channel code 15 12 11 8 3 0 P 2 3010 0011 0000 0001 0000 Sat command 3 0010 0000 0000 0001 0000 codes Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area Description top channel 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 2 0011 0000 0001 0000 Gommand code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Restart Restart the controller When a restart command is executed BUSY does not turn off even after the command execution bit turns off After a restart command is executed perform a memory clear of
216. ng with External Devices FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link This section explains how to set the required communication specifications and the input format when using PLC Link to communicate with external devices Communication Processing Flow PLC Link Communication between the PLC and FZ3 is performed using the 3 link areas indicated below the command area response area and data area The command area is used when control commands are sent from the PLC to the FZ3 The FZ3 can be controlled by writing commands to the command area In the response area the execution results of control commands described in the command area are written The output data accompanying measurement is written to the data output area PLC link area Controller F23 Command area Command data to the controller is written Control input Command code Command parameters Command written to the command area is executed Execution results are written to the FLC response area Execution results from the Control output controller are written Command code Response code Response data Data output area Output data accompanying Output data from the measurement is written to controller is written the data output area Output data 0 to 7 When using PLC Link it is necessary to specify PLC Link with the communication module Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 112
217. nite path Save destinations include directories under the following systems Be sure to attach an SCN Save dastination extension to the file name USBDisk RAMDisk If the specified file name already exists this existing file will be overwritten Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response Example When scene data of scene No 3 is saved with the file name LABEL SCN in the SCNO1 folder in the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned lt Command gt SICINIS AIVIE 13 USBDisk2 IMGO1 LABEL1 SCN lt Response gt OJK Sr 166 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual SCRSWITCH Switches the ADJUST window RUN window The currently displayed window switches to the ADJUST window or RUN window If the current window is the RUN window it switches to the ADJUST window If the current window is the ADJUST window it switches to the RUN window lt Command format gt SICIRIS W 1 T IC HS lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally O KIS When processing is not performed normally IE RISR SGRLOAD Reads scene group data lt Command format gt slciRiL ojlajo TT TT _ File name of scene group data scene group No max 2 digits lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally OlKISR When processing is not performed normally IEIRI2 lt Parameters ex
218. nnunnununununnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnn 282 About OR Setting NOT Setting nuununnnununnuNNENNNNNENNNNNNNSENSENNNNEENEENSENSENEHNSHNENHSENNNENENNENNENNN 290 About Number of Logging Images n nuuuuunnununnnnNNNNNNNENSNNNNNSNNSHNNNNSENEHNSHNSHNEHNSENENSENNNENENNENNENNN 292 About Limits on the Number of Image Input Processing Items Used srrrrrrstrrrtrereteteteter eter eeeees 293 About Max Number of Loading Images during Multiple Image Input s rrrsrrrrrrtrereeeeeteter tree trees 295 Character Code Table Wee 296 Upper Limits of Processing Item Parameters cccttt ttt ster tess eees eee eee ee eeee eee ee eee eee e naan eeaeee enna 297 About Memories Usable with FZ Series ete Petree reece eer rere errr errr reer rece errr reer ee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 298 010 2 Gide eee 299 FZ3 User s Manual 5 How This Manual Is Organized This manual includes two manuals the User s Manual which describes basic operations and settings for vision sensors and the Processing Item List Manual which describes the setting options for each processing item Conventions Used in This Manual Symbols The symbols used in this manual have the following meanings Indicates relevant operational precautions that must be followed Indicates operation related suggestions from OMRON Use of Quotation Marks and Brackets In this manual menus and other items are indicated as follows Menu Indicates the menu names or processing items shown in the menu bar
219. ns extension dimension 0 to 2 0 mm Aperture adjustment knob Aperture locking screw M1 4 Lens locking ring Aperture locking screw M1 4 Lens locking ring 254 About Lenses FZ3 User s Manual Max O D Thickness 12 Extension tube 10 mm Extension tube 15 mm Extension tube 5 mm 3 piece set Note Do not overlap the 0 5 mm 1 0 mm and 2 0 mm extension tubes Since these lenses are installed between the lens and the threaded section of another extension tube overlapping of 2 or more of these tubes will cause unstable fixation When a close up exceeds 30 mm reinforcement is necessary depending on the amount of vibration FZ3 User s Manual About Lenses 255 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy Error Messages and Troubleshooting This section lists error messages that display on the screen and solutions to problems AWE ERR When a message with this symbol is displayed the ERROR signal on the parallel interface is ON Error message No value set Please set value Remedy A value must be set for this item Please set value Do the following errors exist in settings for an expression set up Different number of open close parentheses Enora n Connecting separately to TJG Unit value function operator comma expression l ae l Operator is set at beginning or end of expression The number of function operands is insufficient or there are more than is needed Cannot add object Out of r
220. nt position setting Set Get 0 Figure method 1 Expression 125 Reference coordinate display Set Get 2 Del ISP AGE 1 Displayed FZ3 User s Manual Compensate image 231 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy sojqe soudJejJoy eu1 x7 0 Black l 1 White 126 Reference coordinate display Set Get 2 Red color 3 Green 4 Blue 427 Measurement coordinate Set Get 0 Not displayed display 1 Displayed 0 Black 1 White 128 en ie E pey 3 Green 4 Blue 129 Filtered image Set Get I R pN ici 1 Filtered image Filtering No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 120 Target Set Get ee amera eas 1 Prev unit image 0 OFF 1 Weak smoothing 2 Strong smoothing 3 Dilation die ye 4 Erosion 121 Filtering Set Get 5 Median 6 Extract vertical edges 7 Extract horizontal edges 8 Extract edges 9 Enhance edges a 0 Filtering to BGS 122 Filtering order Set Get 1 BGS to Filtering l 0 3 3 123 Filter size Set Get 4 5 5 Lower limit for 124 BGS levels Set Get 0 to 255 Upper limit for 125 BGS levels Set Get 0 to 255 Background Suppression No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 232 Compensate image FZ3 User s Manual 121 Color setting mode 122 Lower limit for common colors 123 Upper limit for common colors 124 MIN R 125 MAX
221. nual This chapter explains methods for saving and loading settings data and image data i Reference Basic Knowledge about Data Saving p 94 i Reference Saving Settings Data to Controller Memory p 96 i Reference Saving Settings Data to RAMDisk USB Device p 98 i Reference Saving Logging Images to RAMDisk USB Device p 100 i Reference Copying Moving Files p 101 i Reference Loading Settings Data to Controller p 103 93 ejyeq Bulpeo7 bulaes gt e1eq Bulpeo7 bulnes gt Basic Knowledge about Data Saving This section explains methods for saving and loading settings data and image data About Saving Areas The following saving areas can be used with this device Saving area Description Flash Settings data is saved in this area Data is held even after the power is turned off memory This is the area where images are temporarily stored when logging images using the On board logging function memory This memory is a ring memory and images will be overwritten starting with the oldest Controller image if the maximum number of save images is exceeded Can be used as a temporary file save destination Data is cleared if the controller power is turned off The RAMDisk data can be sent to or received from external devices using the FTP function RAM disk Used to back up settings data as a precaution to copy settings data to another USB memory controller and to load data to a PC To keep data save to the U
222. of images that can be loaded based on each specification is shown below FZ3 3 OO FZ3 H3 OO FZ3 7 OO FZ3 H7 OU FZ3 User s Manual About Max Number of Loading Images during Multiple Image Input 295 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy For the case of character related process items recognized characters are output to an external device using a character code base 10 Calculation method for output value base 10 Number of upper level bits x 16 number of lower level bits of recognized character Output value Examples If the recognized character is 2 50 is output If the recognized character is C 67 is output Upper 4 bits Lower 4 bits ne c amp i gt nz 2 al x a om ar Di E 296 Character Code Table FZ3 User s Manual For processing items where the upper limit value is changed based on the image size of the camera being used the description of the upper limit value is expressed using _ MAX Upper limit values for each camera are as follows NAN 17S max vainen he fogg 1599 2447 X axis orientation ymax The macvalue inne Izz 1199 2043 Y axis orientation 239 straight line W 599 straight line W 1021 straight line W W_MAX Maximum width 319 799 1223 239 circle ellipse 599 circle ellipse 1021 circle ellipse R1 R_MAX Maximum radius R1 319 R1 799 1223 A_MAX Maximum area ead Leone ae z Y_MAX 1 307200 Y_MAX
223. ogyExplanation 271 Remeasuringsavedimages 76 RESET 161 Restart 23 ResultDisplay ExternalReference 247 RS 232C RS 422 126 147 RUNwindow 60 RUNwindowdisplayselection 114 RUNwindowselection 14 Savelastloggingimage 83 Savetofile 98 Savingduringscenegroupswitch 108 ScanEdgePosition ExternalReference 211 ScanEdgeWidth ExternalReference 212 SCENE 161 Scene 28 Scene TerminologyExplanation 272 FZ3 User s Manual Scenedatasaving 98 Triggerdelay 106 Scenegroup 32 Scenegroup TerminologyExplanation 273 j l l Scenegroupdatasaving 98 Unit TerminologyExplanation 274 Scenegroupswitch 50 au MORNA WG Sceneswitch 50 PRSTAN Aai Sceneswitchtime 108 V SCNGROUP 163 Valueinput 275 SCNLOAD 165 VERGET 175 SCNSAVE 166 Screencapture 91 Ww SCRSWITCH 167 Wait ExternalReference 243 Search ExternalReference 199 7 Searchprocessing 262 Zoomfunction 279 Searchspeed 264 Selectimages 76 SensitiveSearch ExternalReference 201 Serialinterface 122 SetUnitData ExternalReference 240 SetUnitFigure ExternalReference 240 Setupchanges 28 SGRLOAD 167 SGRSAVE 168 Shape 264 ShapeSearch ExternalReference 206 Shiftarea 49 Simplifiednon stopadjustment 79 Skippingangle 265 Startupsetting 112 STEPinmeasure 108 STEPsetting 116 StripesRemovalFilter ExternalReference 235 SubimageNo 70 Subnetmask 124 147 Sub pixel TerminologyExplanation 272 Synchronizationoutput 179 187 SYSDATA 169 SYSLOAD 171 SYSSAVE 172 Systemdatasaving 98 Systemenvironmentsettings 1
224. or No ry II specific color Detect with Gravity and Area non specific color Color Data Quantity Inspection Measurement Prochem name Side by side FZ3 User s Manual Processing Item Selection Guidelines 41 MO 4 JUsLUaINSes sauss Buas MO 4 JUsLUaINSes SoUsDS Bues Inspection for Presence of Different Objects Judgment condition Number of marki Is shape of marking ls the marking Procltem name i changed oblique Specify the Rotation ange of measurement parameter Hole Position Measurement Circle shape Procltem name Perfect circle Cirde Search Q Selecting Measurement Processing Items According to the Measurement Method and Purpose This section describes methods for selecting processing items appropriate to different measurement objectives such as counting quantities checking for deformation and checking for contamination Reference Measuring Positions p 43 Reference Detecting Defects and Foreign Materials p 44 Reference Count p 44 Reference Measuring Dimensions p 45 42 Processing Item Selection Guidelines FZ3 User s Manual Reference Measuring Folding of Papers and Sheets p 45 Reference Checking the Interior Exterior and Direction p 45 Reference Checking for Mixing of Different Objects p 46 Reference Checking for Deformation p 47 Reference Inspecting Characters p 47 Measuring positions Method objective References P
225. ormed normally IE IR r lt Parameters explanation gt rocessing UN Specifies the processing unit No 0 to 9999 No External Varies depending on the specified processing unit processing items For details see the reference table External Reference Table of the processing items registered in the processing unit No Reference External Reference Tables p 195 Setting data Set the settings data parameters Example When Skipping angle external reference table value 124 in Search set as the 6th processing unit processing unit number 5 is changed to 10 lt Command gt LUPNEITTIDIATTIAT 5 17 2 4 1110 lt Response gt OIK R 174 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Example When Verification string external reference table value 139 in Character Inspection set as the 6th processing unit processing unit number 5 is changed to ABC lt Command gt UJN T DIAL TIAL 5 4 3 9 AIBIC lt Response gt O K r VERGET Acquires the controller version information lt Command format gt VIEIRIGIE T fr lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally Version information IZ Se When processing is not performed normally EJR r lt Parameters explanation gt Type of controller Version information Software version Example When the controller type is FZ3 XXxX
226. ory When saving image files directly under the root directory the number of images that can be saved is about 126 due to FAT file format limitations If file names are shortened this can be increased to a maximum of 512 Save in sub folders When saving in sub folders USBDisk SUB etc and not in the root directory a maximum of 999 images can be saved in each folder Analyzing Logging Data Acquired data is referred to and processed and settings are analyzed Checking Logging Data with a PC This section uses the example of saving logging data in the USB memory 1 Copy logging data saved to the USB memory to the PC 2 Open folder with copied data fie Di Vew Faeries foo tek ir Omi i Deve e ree E LIC We ae Flea OA e ha y gja Foden E Hja aca i i Me O Sve Hgs Lj ped ou co ri G Meno i Set Mie erat iy Set ge ie oe ij Creat ae iy bale ey iy tl i fMin g So I La So 3 Open using an application associated with the extension csv Explanation is given here using examples displayed in Excel 88 Useful Functions for Operation FZ3 User s Manual O fB es 6A tdn er Om Cre _ P0084 1 2 102 500 20060417 1042 5204 20060412 1042 5415 20060417 1042 5550 20080412 1042 54638 20080412 1042 5732 20060412 1042 58904 20080412 1042 5898 20060412 1042 5968 20060412 1043 0054 euceosts 1043 0103 e _ 1A b y a Ce Ai j _ coo ccocoo 5 1 2 3 l 5 6 f 8
227. ositioning of low contrast measurement objects ECM Search Effective for location positioning of measurement objects such as LCD substrates glass substrates and sheets which have low contrast and in which color differences at measurement locations are not obvious Reference Processing Item List Manual ECM Search p 73 Label position detection Robot arm positioning Position measurement for measurement objects with variations Other positioning Edge Position Effective for detecting whether the label position is off center raised or lowered and whether the label is affixed on bottles and cans Reference Processing Item List Manual Edge Position p 114 Search Effective for position measurement that includes tilting of the measurement object due to handling with robot arms Reference Processing ltem List Manual Search p 42 Flexible Search Effective for position measurement of measurement objects in which there are variations in markings or shape such as with inspection of packaging etc Reference Processing Item List Manual Flexible Search p 53 Pasitian measurement Search If the shape and background of the measurement object are constant a processing item such as one that registers an image as a model and searches for this image is effective Reference Processing Item List Manual Search p 42 Locating of reference mark of base plate FZ3 User s
228. p the System menu Controller Create shortcut 2 Set the functions to be added biisi faasilia jigi Added short cut 3 Set the sequence as required Short cuts are added in the sequence set here Switch to ADJUST mode Enter simplificd non stop adj Scene switch Measure Note Some of these short cuts have functions such as scene switching which affect measurement A password protection function can be added in order to restrict use Reference Setting the RUN Window Password Password Setting p 117 Setting the Encoder Trigger Encoder Trigger Setting 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Encoder trigger setting 2 Set the target encoder Target Encoder Tse Encoder trigger Resolution pulsefratation i 0 0000 pul se degree Te Set value R Setting item Racoryaleeull Description Encoder 0 Encoder 1 Target Encoder Sets the encoder to be used Checked Sets whether the encoder trigger will be Use Encoder trigger Unchecked used FZ3 User s Manual Setting the System Operation Environment 115 yu wuoJaug wazs S y BulbuUeUD o JUBWUOJIAUQ W9a1SAS y BulbuUeUD oO 3 Set the trigger detailed settings as required Trigger sett ing Trigger signal Phase A Enable timing ENABLE start tet Pulse reset timing Every trigger pulse Pulse A xI 0 0 0000 degree OE Bl Ele Ey
229. p the date that is to be set 2 Set the time 3 Tap OK The Date time Setting window closes selecting the Language Language Setting Sets the language used for the characters displayed on the screen Messages in the application software will be displayed in Japanese or English depending on the language selected here 110 Setting the System Operation Environment FZ3 User s Manual Note When a controller with default factory settings is started up the Language Setting window is automatically displayed The controller factory default setting is Japanese language display If the language setting is changed to English the system automatically restarts 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Language setting The Language Setting window is displayed 2 Tap and select a language Select language of the ovale Language fetish Ta ate Ok Cancel 3 Tap OK A confirmation message is displayed 4 Tap Yes Chance language fo select TES save seliines and svales restart es The setting is saved in the controller and the system automatically restarts After the system restarts the language switches to the selected one Note The Language Setting window is displayed also when restarting after executing System initialization Setting the Fan Rotation Speed Fan Control Setting Sets the rotation speed of the controller fan Note The factory default
230. planation gt Scene group No Specifies the scene group No to be read 0 to 31 Specifies the name of the file to be read with a definite path pllesialtie OF Only files that are under the following systems and have an SGP extension can be read scene group ae USBDisk RAMDisk portent ccc Do not turn off power to the controller until there is a response FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 167 S 9JA9 JEUJO XJ y m BuljeoluNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt Example When LABEL SGP in the IMG01 folder of the USB memory to which the drive name USBDisk2 is assigned is loaded to scene group 3 lt Command gt SIGIRILIOJAIDI 13 USBDisk2 IMG01 LABEL1 SGP lt Response gt O K Cr Note For the USB memory drive see Reference About USB Drive Names p 94 SGRSAVE Saves scene group data lt Command format gt SIGIRISJA VIE krri l L Scene group No max 2 digits Pa FR Save destination lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally O KI SR When processing is not performed normally lt Parameters explanation gt nl oe Specifies the scene group No to save 0 to 31 Specifies the save destination and file name during saving with a definite path SE Save destinations include directories under the followin
231. r external reference Set Get 0 to 2499 153 Vertical horizontal width for line sort Set Get 1 to 255 160 N x 10 Flag N used for registered color Set Get 0 Not used N Oto7 N Oto 7 1 Used 161 Nx 10 Flag N for registered color OR NOT Set Get 0 OR N Oto7 N Oto 7 1 NOT 162 N x 10 Register the max color hue N N 0to7 N Oto7 Set Get 0 to 359 163 N x 10 Register the min color hue N N 0to7 N Oto7 Set Get 0 to 359 164 N x 10 Register the max color saturation N N 0to7 N Oto7 Set Get 0 to 255 165 N x 10 Register the min color saturation N N 0to7 N Oto7 Set Get 0 to 255 166 N x 10 Register the max color brightness N N 0to7 N Oto7 Set Get 0 to 255 167 N x 10 Register the min color brightness N N 0to7 N 0to7 Set Get 0 to 255 0 Black 168 N x 10 Background color N Peete N 0to7 N Oto7 Set Get 2 Red 3 Green 4 Blue 0 Light 500 Dynamic binary classification Set Get i Dark 3 Not equal FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 219 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy 501 503 504 505 s jqe 9Uu 1 J Y eu1 x7 506 507 510 Dynamic binary average filter size for monochrome cameras only Reference angle Extraction condition setting Sort condition XY sort condition Sort row column sequence 1 Judgement object label Set Get 3 Set Get 1 mo p 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 to 255 80 to 180 AND OR Are
232. r rrr errr errr rrr rere errr r err ree tree eee eee ee eee eee ee ee 204 Shape Searcht virtrtrtt rrr rrr rr eee eeeeeer er eenrenenreneneeneneeeeeeeeennes 206 Classification SECC PCCOP CCCP SCeSeCO LoCo CeCe CeCe Tee CeCe eC e eee eee reece eee reer eee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 208 Edge Position trrrrrrrsrerssssssnnnunununnnnunununnnnunununnununununnununununnununununnununununnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 209 Edge Pitch rrrrsrssersssenunununnnnunununnnnunununnununununnununununnununununnunununnnnununnnunnununununnnnnnnnnnnnn 210 FZ3 User s Manual 3 Scan Edge Position eM ee eR RRC ee RRR A CN a eMC ee Pe RR CCR CRM ECR RE ECR ECR CA Gee oe ee ee a CR eR eR oe Rae 211 Scan Edge Width sttrttrrsrrrtrrrsrrsrrrtrrrtrrsrtrstenttrntnrnnentnrnttntnentnnntnnnnnnnnnnnnnnEnnEnnnEnnn ennnen 212 Color Dala ee O E ee eee eer a NE 213 Gravity and Area irr tr rr tr i tir ni ii ii iitiriiiireeinereirttg 214 Labeling eee 216 label Dara ee ee oer er ne Eee eee roe Pree eee eee eon ee eee eee 217 10 pg 218 Defect arini orkiem ee ce ee oe ee ee ee ee ee 292 Bracee Delect aieen tena hare aceeeteadins tetera a a O er RATE 292 Fine Matching ttt rr rn nr ri i iriiicieciiirrriiresinies 223 Character Inspection tt rrrrtrrrrrtrrtrrtrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrttrtnrtrtnnrtenrtnrtnnnrnnEnnrnrEntEntEnnEEnEn EEn 224 Date ilies les ee E E G 225 Model Dictionary nce 226 Barcode k mereen ran aao EREKE R T E EAE aa xa aneacaenececesseneGumentanceaeess 297 H
233. r s Manual All controller settings can be restored to factory default status initialization In addition the controller can be restarted Reference Initializing Controller System Initialization p 23 Reference Restarting Controller System Restart p 23 Initializing Controller Restores the controller to factory default status Before initialization back up required data such as scene data and system data Reference Saving Settings Data to RAMDisk USB Device p 98 1 On the Main screen tap System Controller System initialization The System Initialization window is displayed 2 Tap Execute A confirmation window is displayed 3 Tap Yes Restart the controller Before restarting back up required data such as scene data and system data Reference Saving Settings Data to Controller Memory p 96 1 On the Main screen tap System Controller System restart The System Restart window is displayed 2 Tap OK The controller restarts FZ3 User s Manual Returning Controller to Factory Settings 23 uoneledO aojeg uoneledO aojeg saving Settings and Turning Power Off Before turning off power to the controller perform the following operations to save the data that you have set The controller loads scene data from the flash memory each time it is started up Therefore the power is turned off without saving data to the flash memory and any changes made will
234. rch inspection FZ3 User s Manual Measurement Mechanism 265 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy Roughly search within Perform detailed the search region for searches in the areas candidate points around each candidate point Edge Detection Measurement This method extracts parts with color changes as edges to perform measurement Edges are found through color changes in the measurement region It finds edges using color changes in the measurement region When calulating the X coordinate of this edge Measurement 1 nm n region n i m ce ee old Edge Level Indicates the edge color change level degree of color difference This level is adjusted if edges cannot be accurately detected Note The value 0 to 100 for the edge level indicates the edge intensity It is not related to color differences in the original image For case of measurement using relative position with regards to width of color difference The edges are detected in the following manner 1 Calculate the overall distribution of color difference in the measurement region 2 Min color difference value 0 Max color difference value 100 3 Locations in which there is an edge level color difference are detected as edges Edge Position Measurement _ region 100 sie p Max color difference Edge level Min colar difference 266 Measurement Mechanism FZ3 User s Manual Edge Pitch Example x
235. rd party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Prod uct in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the particular Product with respect to Buyers application product or system Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases but the following is a non exhaustive list of applications for which particular attention must be given i Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this document ii Use in consumer products or any use in significant quantities iii Energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equip ment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations iv Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or prop erty Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Prod uct NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON S PRODUCT IS PROP ERLY RATED AND INSTALLED F
236. re angle of search results designated VRA Ure and eanengemen peronly by Label No for external reference er Magnification X of search results designated 21 Magnification X arrangement Get only by Search Na for extermalreierenee boe in Magnification Y of search results designated 22 Magnification Y arrangement Get only by o earch No fore seral rer erence 101 Output Coordinates Set Get ATEO 1 Before scroll ee 0 OFF 102 Calibration Set Get 4 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get IOD os 1 OFF 120 Upper limit of the rotation angle Set Get 180 to 180 121 Lower limit of the rotation angle Set Get 180 to 180 0 OFF 1 XY 130 Scaling Set Get 2X 3 Y 206 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 131 Upper limit of the scale Set Get 100 to 110 132 Lower limit of the scale Set Get 90 to 100 140 Reverse Set Get cade 150 Detection point X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 151 Detection point Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 152 Reference X Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 153 Reference Y Set Get 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 160 Candidate Point Level Set Get O to 100 161 Label No Set Get 0 to 99 162 Label No for external reference Set Get 0 to 99 170 Count Set Get O to 100 0 Fast 171 Sub pixel detection method Set Get 1 Normal 2 Fine 173 Search level Set Get Pome 1 Manual 174 Upper limit of search level Set Get 2tod5 176 Sort condition Set Get Oto 5 180 Judgement upper limit for number Set Get 0 to 100
237. re as follows ltem Processing item Camera Image Input Camera Image Input HDR nputimage Camera Switching Measurement Image Switching Position Compensation Trapezoidal Correction Filtering Background Suppression Color Gray Filter Compensate Extract Color Filter ee Anti Color Shading Stripes Removal Filter Halation Cut Panoramat Note 1 Polar Transformation Note 2 Display Display Image File Note 3 result Display Last NG Image Note 4 Note 1 When using Panoramat each image input related unit after Panorama may consume up to a maximum of 4 items Note 2 When using a Polar Transformation each image input related unit after Polar Transformation may consume up to a maximum of 2 items Note 3 The number of items that Display Image File processes is equal to the value set for number of images per unit Note 4 The number of items that Display Last NG Image processes is equal to the value set for number of FZ3 User s Manual About Limits on the Number of Image Input Processing Items Used 293 sexipueddy jo sexipueddy save images per unit EES If there is one or more Sensitive Search in the flow the number of image input related items that can be used is only reduced by one 294 About Limits on the Number of Image Input Processing Items Used FZ3 User s Manual The function that enables continuous high speed image input is called the multiple image input function The maximum number
238. reen priority Communication module select FZ3 User s Manual Selects whether to display the measurement manager bar at start up Specifies whether measurement results display or menu operation is to have priority Measurement results display processing will have priority over menu operation Menu operation will be harder to receive due to its lowered priority status Menu operation is prioritized Measurement results display may be incomplete Measurement initialization is performed immediately after scene switching or flow editing Specifies whether measurement trigger receipt or screen re drawing processing has priority during measurement initialization Measurement trigger reception is prioritized even during processing including measurement processing Display for screen re drawing processing may be incomplete due to its lowered priority status Screen re drawing processing is prioritized Measurement triggers will not be received until screen re drawing processing is complete Setting the System Operation Environment 113 JUBSWUOJIAUQ Wa1SAS y BulbuUeUD o JUBWUOJIAUQ W9a1SAS y BulbuUeUD oO gt Normal Normal Fxxx series Sets the communication module Serial Ethernet method Serial Ethernet PLC Link Normal Normal Fxxx series method SYSMAC CS CJ CP External devices are communicated with One using non procedure communications For Normal the differences between Normal and Norma
239. rence Set the save destination for captured images p 92 2 LCD Off Displayed only with LCD integrated controllers Turns off power to the LCD monitor Tap the bottom of the monitor screen to turn on power to the LCD monitor again Layout of Main Screen RUN Window This window is used during operation 12 Layouts of Screens Windows FZ3 User s Manual 0 5cene group 0 i ee aT 0 Scene 0 Tiara moat O Camera mage Input Fimnage Aii lenge leyg Aclive image Image raster 1 liitt Bede Tir coat Ponit iesi CON ocrr Sub letis TTia bi Swi bo AORT maai Enter dimelified non stop adj k erea e ee me a Measurement Information Display Area O Scene group 0 0 5cene 0 1 Overall judgement Displays a scene s overall judgement result OK NG The judgement results for each processing unit are displayed in the Control area 2 Processing time Displays the time required for the measurement process 3 Scene Group Name Scene Name Displays the scene group number and the scene number of the currently displayed scene b Image Display Area Displays the measured image 1 Property setting buttons Displays the name of the currently selected processing item FZ3 User s Manual Layouts of Screens Windows 13 uonejadO aojeg uoneledO aojeg C Control Area Displays Flow Detail result Image display and Tool box Flow Displays the judgement results for the flo
240. rform calibration when selecting output to external devices Reference Calibration p 272 Calibration ON Calibration is performed during output and measured values after calibration are output Calibration OFF Calibration is not performed during output and coordinate values from camera images are output 270 Measurement Mechanism FZ3 User s Manual This section gives descriptions of terms Position compensation When the location and direction of measured objects are not fixed the positional deviation between reference position and current position is calculated and measurement is performed after correcting Please select processing items that are appropriate to the measurement object from processing items that are related to position compensation Reference position Measurement area and objects lo be measured are correctly aligned Measurement area Object lo be measured When position of object lo be measured is deflected Object lo be measured overflows Measurement area When posilion deflection correction i salin advance Measurement will ba carried oul aflar Measurement will be canted oul after moving the image fora corresponding moving tha Maasurament area fora deflection and ratuming to the reference position conesponding deflection arep Measurement will ba carried out after m asured object anlars inlo Maasurament area Intelligent camera with lighting function Cameras with a do
241. roduct Software Flow Control is used to adjust transmission speed Model The image pattern that serves as the inspection target Characteristics portions are extracted from images of the object and registered as model registration FZ3 User s Manual Terminology Explanations 273 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy Unit Reference Processing unit p 273 2 s complement Binary numbers are generally used to represent negative numbers Negative numbers are expressed by Inverting all bits of a positive number and adding 1 to the result Example 1 is expressed as 2 s complement 1 can be calculated by 0 1 In the case of 1 minus 1 00000000 0 00000001 1 10000001 1 qa i is expresses with 2 s Complement for amp bits There are methods for simple calculation without performing this kind of computation For instance Negative number inverting all bits of a positive number and then adding 1 to the result 00000001 1 Inverty all bits 11111110 Plus 1 p n 1 The first digit is used to judge whether the number is positive or negative When 0 Positive number or 0 When 1 Negative number The advantage of two s complement numbers is that positive and negative numbers can be used as is in calculations Example When 1 10 9 4444441 4f 1 00001010 10 00001001 9 214 Terminology Explanations FZ3 User s Manual Inouttinc This section describes how to input
242. rtrrrtrrsrrrtrtrtrrsttrntenttnntnrnrrntnrnttnnntntnEntEnnnEnnnnnnEnnEnnEEnnEnnnEnEnEn 240 Get Unit Figure rsttrttrttrrstrrtrrrtrrsrrrtrrrtrrttrntentnrntnrnnnntnrnttnnnentnEntEnnnnnnnnnnEnnEnnEEnnEnnnEnEnEn 240 Tend Monitor ease eee EE E E ee ee ee N tee 241 Image Logging cit Ur rn nr ii i ri ricer cireriirerirrrannes 242 Data Logging stirrer rin i i rrr ciriirreirrrenrtt a 242 Elapsed Time rrr rrr tr nr ti rrr rrrirrcireirerinreaireseresiies 243 WAV Reece E E E E ET 243 Branch adea ee ee ee oe Cee er ere eee ere A 244 Conditional Braich ceiniad enii ee ee ee er ce eee eee 244 Dl Branch mebi aa a A A a T a Ea Na 244 Output result srt rr llr i i ii rrrritirrirerireriresarecies 245 DELCKOLDI 017 SERIEI TE T 245 Parallel Data Output t tt ttrrsrrrrrrrrrtrrrrrtrerrrrrerrrrrnnrrrrrrnrrnrertnnrertnennnnennnnnennnnnnennennEn 245 Parallel Judgement Output t ttttrstrrrtrrtrrrtrrrtrrtrertrrrrrtrtntnrnttnnnnntnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnEnnnEnnnEn EEEn 246 FZ3 User s Manual Display result Serer ee ee Ce ee ee Re ee ee EAA eee ee ee ee oT oe Ce TR Ree eC eee Reg eee ee Re a Re CORE ace Be 247 Result Display unnuununnuunnNSNNNNNNNNNENSENNENSENSENSHNSHNSHNSHNSENEHNHSENSHNEHNSHNEHSEHNHSENEHSENESENENEENNENNN 247 Display Image File rrrrrrerssssssssnennnnnnnnunununnununununnununununnununununnununununnununununnunnnununnnnnnnnnnnnnn 247 Display Last NG Image nsuunuununnunnNNNNNSNNNNNSENSENNENSENEHNSENSHNEENSHNENHNEHNHSENEHNEHHSHNEHSEHNSENENEENNENNE 247 8 Append
243. s Manual Processing Item Selection Guidelines 35 MO 4 u wanseapw s u os Huas Position Compensation Marking for position compensation Intersection of rectangle or line Is shape of marking changed not oblique MO 4 JUsLUaINSes sauss Buas e changed 36 Processing Item Selection Guidelines Frocli m name Edge Position Position Compensation Position Compensation Search Position Compensation Flexible Search Position Compensation FZ3 User s Manual Locating Measurement Objects Not Inclined Shape of locating marking Specific object shape of locating tag Procitem name Edge Position Is shape of marking Position of Marking Measurement changed frequency Position of an object i Search Set Sub pie of measurement parameter to tes Search Calculation I Flexible Search Non specific abject For tag with specified color Gravity and Area FZ3 User s Manual Processing Item Selection Guidelines 37 MO 4 JUsLUaINSes SoUsDS Buas Locating Measurement Objects Inclined specific object Locating marking Froclte m name Circle __ eee Shape of locating Circle Angie tag Other than above ke Specify the Rotation angle of measurement Marameter Non specific object For tag with MO 4 JUsLUaINSes SoUsDS Bues Internal and Extern
244. s setting may causes result NG memory shortage when on measuring The problem occurred in the system E ERR Insufficient memory may occur during measurement Reset the model parameters For Search Reference Processing Item List Manual The judgement is NG insufficient memory p 51 For Flexible Search Reference Processing Item List Manual The judgement is NG insufficient memory p 60 For Classification Reference Processing Item List Manual The judgement is NG insufficient memory p 112 Controller failure Please contact one of our branches or regional offices 256 Error Messages and Troubleshooting FZ3 User s Manual The problem occurred in system date The system battery is insufficient F ERR Failed to switch scene Failed to switch scene group or save scene group on switch Failed to clear scene group Cannot read selected file Confirm selected file once again The communication time out is occurred ME ERR Error input range Please input correctly File name contains invalid character Failed to save file Please check Fan voltage error A ERR A camera outside the guarantee is connected Low battery for backup of date and time data level The battery needs to be replaced Please return the old battery to one of our branches or regional offices Is a USB disk connected to the controller A USB disk is needed to read scenes after scene
245. saved into the internal flash memory in the controller Make sure to save when settings have been modified Scene switch To switch a scene group or scene Measure Stop meas 10 Layouts of Screens Windows FZ3 User s Manual Starts stops measurement Switch to RUN mode Switches to the RUN window d Image Display Area Displays the measured image 1 Property setting buttons Displays the name of the currently selected processing item Moving to the property setting window can be done by tapping here e Control Area Displays Test measurement Flow Detail result and Image display Test measurement Use when test measurement conditions and images that have been acquired are used for remeasurement Flest mows omen Flow Displays the judgement results for the flow and each unit Hezk A unit E Search _4 jo Z ledge Position 9 Jefect ay 1 Moves to the top processing unit with an NG error 2 Moves to the next processing unit with an NG error Detail result The detailed measurement results of the processing units selected in the measurement flow are displayed as text FZ3 User s Manual Layouts of Screens Windows 11 uonejadO aojeg uoneledO aojeg Fiatal raul Image display Sets the display method for the Image Display area Beliwe mane image number Con more 1 2 1 Capture Saves the content displayed on the monitor as an image Refe
246. seapw SoUBDS Huas MO 4 u wanseapw SoUdDS Huas Editing Processing Units in Scenes In the Edit Flow window editing buttons in the window can be used to change the order of processing units within the scene or to delete processing units fees ae ical fel ia Merna reri a sS z 1 Search gh Flexible Search i mani pe Seneitrer Garth i E i 7 Edie Pg ct P Ech Sanch i i Ge Citin Search J F kar le Saach a Chliceudeseon Sairi J E Eig Pootion F 4 Wieamnnenar baspa Setchrn bij Eies Fic we E w Es Flir 3 m E Hajh A i To Gay ou ay iP ote z Laba Hth Cet Presne Serie 48 3 Ay ef Ta Fre Bache a Lee ip haii bre gape anj galga aali n ee ee i LOD off Searching processing units ra Convenient when the processing unit you want to select is not displayed on the screen Selecting a processing unit F yd gt In addition to tapping the property setting button icons the editing buttons can be used to automatically select the processing unit at the top or bottom or above or below an arbitrarily selected processing unit in the unit list Specifying the position for a processing unit and adding it me E mer Adds and inserts a processing unit at th
247. set to None Reference When Output Control Is Set to None p 184 Input signal Signal Function DIO to 6 OFF DIT This is the execution trigger After DIO to 6 is set turn DI7 ON after an interval over 1 ms Note The ERROR signal turns on when the input command is not correctly performed When Output Control Is Set to Handshaking The controller outputs measurement results while synchronized with external devices If this function is used when multiple measurement results are output in sequence it enables efficient and effective data transfer 186 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual Inputting a measurement trigger in the STEP signal Example When 3 expressions are set in Parallel Data Output RUN BUSY OR DO GATE DSA Start Measurement Exit Measurement OFF Jo ON has STEP input OFF ff ON a Perform Measurement Final judgment Output will be carried out independently from DSA when measurement is over OFF 14 it L Ren eres ii ON i Rising time A a es oe a a S ON T lt gt Overtime __ ium a eas After completion of After GATE signal is ON After GATE signal is OFF many data measurement overtime overtime error is deemed if are output for every measurement error is deemed if DSA DSA signal isn t OFF within overtime error is deemed if DSA signal signal isn t ON within the the set time isn t ON within the set time
248. sk Logging error sexipueddy 258 Error Messages and Troubleshooting FZ3 User s Manual FAQ During Start up POWER LED not lit Is the power supply connected correctly Is the supply voltage low 24 V DC 10 15 Nothing is displayed on the monitor Is the monitor ON Is the monitor cable connected correctly Is the monitor malfunctioning Is the power capacity sufficient LCD monitor Have you turned off the LCD If you have monitor recovery will occur if you tap on the bottom of the monitor Disordered monitor images Are the power supply and cable generating electronic noise Is the monitor cable connected correctly Cannot input Are the cables for input devices mouse etc connected correctly Is the angle too big when tapping is done with the touch pen Camera image does not display Image is blurry Is the lens cap removed Is the camera cable connected correctly Is the lens aperture at the maximum or the minimum Is the camera s shutter speed correct Is the lighting method correct During Operation Measurement results do not display on the monitor Are windows other than the Main screen the Edit Flow window etc displayed Are there any setting windows open A setting window is defined as a window that opens separately such as the Edit Flow window and the Scene Maintenance window The touch screen responds slowly Are you tapping the touch screen continuously and quic
249. ss Input the default gateway address Input the DNS server address Input Output setting Input mode Normal This item cannot be changed Input form ASCII This item cannot be changed a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 Output IP address c 0 to 255 Input the output destination IP address S 9JA9 Jeu1ax7 y m Bugesiunwwon pue Hunosuuo JO SPON gt d 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 65535 Set the port No to use for data I O 9600 with the controller 3 Tap OK The settings are confirmed and the Ethernet window closes Input Output port No setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 Non procedure Communication specifications such as communication speed and IP addresses are set for serial interface RS 232C 422 connection communication Reference Setting Communication Specifications Ethernet Non procedure p 145 FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure 147 mportant cc Before setting the communication specifications set the Serial RS 232C 422 communication module to either Normal or Normal Fxxx series method store to the controller then restart the system Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 112 Use the same communication specification settings for the controller and the external device Note During setting of communication specifications input signals cannot be handled However t
250. sses claims costs and expenses including attorney s fees and expenses related to any claim inves tigation litigation or proceeding whether or not Omron is a party which arises or is alleged to arise from Buyer s acts or omissions under these Terms or in any way with respect to the Products Without limiting the foregoing Buyer at its own expense shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron and defend or set tle any action brought against such Companies to the extent based on a claim that any Product made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of another party Property Confidentiality Any intellectual property in the Products is the exclu sive property of Omron Companies and Buyer shall not attempt to duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Omron Notwithstanding any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling all engineering and tooling shall remain the exclusive property of Omron All information and materials supplied by Omron to Buyer relating to the Products are confidential and proprietary and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly prevent disclosure to any third party Export Controls Buyer shall comply with all applicable laws regulations and licenses regarding i export of products or information iii sale of products to forbidden or other proscribed persons and ii disclosure to non citizens of regulated technology or inform
251. st of processing items provided Scene Edit Unit Edit Scene n Unit 0 Camera Image Input J Search Model registration Region setting Judgement condition Available unit operations Edit Unit Procittem List Available scene operations Calculationg Search Edit Scene Conditional Branch Adddelete unit Shift Unit Camera Image Input Rename an Unit Delete scene Chssiicaton ft Defect J eel eae Scene Switch Changing the set up using the scene function Multiple scenes can be created For example by creating scenes for each measurement object such as using Scene 0 to inspect an ABC label and Scene 1 to inspect an XYZ label changing the set up can be performed smoothly just by changing the scene even when the measurement object and measurement objective have changed Reference Switching Scenes and Scene Groups p 50 Up to 32 scenes can be set In case where over 32 scenes are required these can be divided into scene groups for easier management Reference What Is a Scene Group p 32 Scene Examples The processing items registered to the scene are called processing units In the Edit Flow window where scenes are created select processing items required for measurement and add them to the flow The number at the top of the processing unit is called the Unit No If the measurement trigger is activated processing is executed
252. sult OK 1 Judgement result NG 0 OFF Set Get 1 ON Set Get 45 to 45 Set Get 45 to 45 0 OFF Set Get 1 ON Set Get 1to15 Set Get 1to3 FZ3 User s Manual Barcode No Data name Set Get Data range 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 6 Decoded character Get only 0 to CHAR_NUM_MAX 1 count 7 aa character Get only 0 to CHAR_NUM_ MAX 1 characters 0 to INDEX _NUM_ MAX 1 1 Where there was no match with any of the index 8 Index Get only l i l l comparison strings or the index comparison string has not been set up Reflect to overall 0 ON R judgement eeueet 1 OFF 0 JAN EAN 8 1 JAN EAN 8 Add On 2 2 JAN EAN 8 Add On 5 3 JAN EAN 13 4 JAN EAN 13 Add On 2 5 JAN EAN 13 Add On 5 6 UPC A 7 UPC A Add On 2 8 UPC A Add On 5 9 UPC E 120 Code type Set Get 40 UPC E Add On 2 11 UPC E Add On 5 12 Code 39 13 Code 93 14 Code 128 15 IFT Interleaved 2 of 5 16 Codabar NW 7 17 GS1 Databar RSS 14 18 GS1 Databar RSS Lim 19 GS1 Databar RSS Exp 421 Flag used for special Set Get 0 are considered to be wild cards character judgement 1 are considered to be character strings Pag econ bec 0 are considered to be wild cards 122 character Set Get o eae 1 are considered to be character strings classification Flag showing 123 character string Set Get Flag regarding whether or not charact
253. surement objects Reference Processing Item List Manual Edge Position p 114 Edge Position Calculation To measure the dimensions of finished products combine Edge Position and Calculation Use Edge Position to measure position and Calculation to calculate dimensions by calculating the distance between positions Reference Processing Item List Manual Edge Position p 114 Reference Processing Item List Manual Calculation p 328 Edge Position Calculation Edge Position is effective when measuring the dimensions of circular work pieces and tilted measurement objects Use this processing item to measure positions and calculate dimensions by calculating the spacing between positions with Calculation Reference Processing Item List Manual Edge Position p 114 Reference Processing Item List Manual Calculation p 328 Measuring folding of papers and sheets Method objective Checking for folding on plain measurement objects References Defect Effective when checking for folding on plain work pieces Reference Processing Item List Manual Defect p 208 Checking the interior exterior and direction Method objective Interior exterior and orientation inspection through presence of markings FZ3 User s Manual References Flexible Search Effective when there is variation in the size and position of the markings to be checked Reference Processing Item List
254. t lt Command gt lt Response gt Oi OIKISR Changing current image display status Changes the currently displayed image mode lt Command format gt Display image mode No lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally O KICR When processing is not performed normally E R amp e lt Parameters explanation gt Display 0 Changes the image modes of all the windows to Through image mode 1 Changes the image modes of all the windows to Freeze No 2 Changes the image modes of all the windows to Last NG Example When changing the current image mode to Last NG lt Command gt lt Response gt O KIEe IMGSAVE Saves image data 158 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual lt Command format gt HiIMIGISJAIVIEl fl E L Save destination Image data No max 3 digits lt Response format gt When processing is performed normally lt Parameters explanation gt Specifies the No of the image data to be saved 0 to max number of logging images _ MAX Image data The maximum number of logging images can be a number with a maximum of 3 digits The number No of images will vary depending on the controller used and the camera connected Reference About Number of Logging Images p 292 Specifies the save destination and file name during saving with a definite path ex USBDisk
255. t 0 OFF 1 ON 125 Area meas LV Set Get 0 to 999 126 Area judgement Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 Precise Defect No Data name Data range cea 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Defect 0 to 999999999 9999 6 Position X 0 to 999999999 9999 7 Position Y 0 to 999999999 9999 8 Area 0 to 999999999 9999 222 Measurement FZ3 User s Manual 9 Gravity X Get only O to 999999999 9999 10 Gravity Y Get only O to 999999999 9999 103 Reflect to overall judgement Set Get Hee 1 OFF 120 Size X 4 to 64 121 Size Y 4 to 64 122 Sampling interval X 1 to 64 123 Sampling interval Y 1 to 64 124 Comparing interval X 1 to 32 125 Comparing interval Y 1 to 32 Detection object color 0 Both white black Set Get White Black 126 1 for monochrome cameras only 2 127 Defect detection direction X Set Get r no 128 Defect detection direction Y Set Get M ae 129 Inclined defect detection direction Set Get A si 130 Defect judgement value Set Get 0 to 999 131 Area measurement Set Get ore 1 ON 132 Area meas LV Set Get 0 to 999 133 Area judgement Set Get 0 to 999999999 9999 ile di 0 OFF 134 Profile display Set Get 1 ON 135 Element display Set Get i Fine Matching No Data name 0 Judgement result 5 Number of labeling 6 Area T Position X 8 Position Y 101 Output Coordinates 102 Calibration 103 Reflect to overall judgement 120 Boundary inspection 121 Boundary lev
256. t be connected with the FZ LEH25 The 5 mm extension tube 5 megapixel digital camera stand alone FZ S O 5M FZ LEH100 FZ LEH75 10000 FZ LEH50 FZ LEH35 FZ LEH25 FZ LEH16 FZ LEH12 FZ LEH8 FZ LEH5 1000 ww Souejsip juswsovejd esawep 100 1000 100 Y view mm 251 About Lenses FZ3 User s Manual sexipueddy Diagram view The horizontal axis of the diagram indicates the Y field of view mm and longitudinal axis indicates camera setting distance mm This diagram shows the relationship between the field of view of lenses and the setting distance for different types Make sure to verify the lens type when checking the graph as the field of view value is different for each type Points such as t5 0 on the graph correspond to the thickness of the extension tube used t0 is used if an extension tube is not necessary and t5 0 is used if a 5 mm extension tube is used Example If the field of view of measurement object is 40 mm and a 3Z4S LEML 5018 lens is used the camera setting distance is set at 500 mm and a 5 mm extension tube is required Camera Extension tube O mm Lens T Type of lens Measurement object Y view Small camera FZ SF O SP O series 10000 FZ LES30 m FZ LES16 FZ LES6 1000 FZ LES3 100 Y view mm 252 About Lenses FZ3 User s Manual Diagram view The horizontal axis of th
257. t keyboard is displayed 2 Switch the tabs as needed and tap the character that is to be input 3 Tap OK after text has been entered The software keyboard is closed Selecting Files and Folders This section describes data save load methods and operation methods for when selecting a save destination folder for images created during remeasurement etc 2 6 Basic Knowledge about Operations FZ3 User s Manual The following window will appear in the window to select a file or a folder a Window Title When a file is specified FileExplorer is displayed If a folder is selected Select folder is displayed b Folder View Area A list of folders on the RAM disk and folders in the mounted USB memory is displayed At the root of the tree the drive names of all accessible USB memory devices are displayed ex USBDisk USBDisk2 C Toolbar Ea Copy Reference Enabled when a folder or file is selected in the List View area p 278 When tapped the file that is selected is copied and Paste becomes enabled Paste Enabled when copying is performed Pastes copied files or folders x lt Delete Reference Enabled when a folder or file is selected in the List View area p 278 If tapped the Deletion Confirmation window is displayed cy Rename Reference Enabled when a folder or file is selected in the List View area p 278 If tapped the Rename window
258. target command codes Command execution result NG 1 FFFF FFFF 7 0000 Acquired scene group No Switching Scenes Switches the scene No to be used Command PLC to Controller Command Bit Command area Description top channel code 19 12 ic X 2 1000 0001 0000 0000 0000 3 0030 0000 0000 0011 0000 Sere anaes FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 135 SOOIAGQ JEUO XJ y m BuljealuNWWOD pue HulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINAQ Jeu1ax7 uyim BuljyealuNWWOD pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt 4 Zz 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Speci MER ENENG Response Controller to PLC Response Bit area Description top channel 15 12 11 8 1 4 3 0 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0011 0000 Store response target command codes 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK 0 0000 0000 NG 1 FFFF FFFF Switching Scene Groups Switches the scene group No to be used Command PLC to Controller Command Bit Command area Description top channel code 15 12 11 8 1 4 3 0 2 2000 0010 0000 0000 0000 3 0030 0000 0000 0011 0000 Set command codes 4 B 0000 0000 0000 0000 e 5 E 0000 0000 0000 0000 No Response Controller to PLC Response Bi area Description top channel 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 2 0010 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0011 0000 Store response target command
259. te cannot be observed from the outside Even if the READY signal remains off STEP signals can be accepted without the ERROR terminal turning on Therefore at this time make the STEP signal input interval slightly longer than the input image time FZ3 User s Manual Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication 191 SOOINAQ JEUJO XJ y m BuljealuNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt s 9lA9d EUA X3 UJIM BuljeolunWwWwoy pue Bunoauuo 10 SPON gt The image logging file and data logging file saved in the controller can be output using FTP protocol Important When sending or receiving files using the FTP function make sure to create file names using one byte alphanumeric characters Set the communication specifications such as IP address and DNS In addition perform input format settings Important Use the same communication specification settings for the controller and the external device 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Communication Serial Ethernet The Ethernet window is displayed 2 Set the following items ee ee eee a EL assii Oba a ee ee ee n 192 Externally Outputting Data through FTP FZ3 User s Manual Set value Setting item Factory Description default Address setting Set the IP address of the controller When Obtain an IP address automatically is selected the IP address of the controller will be automatically obtained When Use the follow
260. ted point is considered noise When acolor is specified If the color difference distributions again falls below the edge level within the width range starting from the point where an edge was first detected the newly detected point is considered noise Edge detection point l f Aiia Ifthe value is below the edge level within the Meas ure mnent ai a l l region i specified width itis considered as noise Noise width pixels Edge level When points are mistakenly detected as edges due to noise increase the color difference value Defect Detection Measurement Color changes within the measurement region are used to find defects such as scratches contamination and chipping After measurement region is drawn a rectangle defect detection region is automatically formed in this region While moving the defect detection region around calculate average density for each area to determine the difference between the original area and the surrounding area This difference is called the defect level Calculate the defect level for all defect detection areas If the maximum value exceeds the judgement value it is judged that there are defects in the measurement region Defect Defect detection size Increasing Defect size allows for shortening of processing time but this will reduce measurement accuracy 268 Measurement Mechanism FZ3 User s Manual Setting item contamination to be detected
261. ted to Operation during Measurement 109 JUBWUOJIAUQ wazs S y BulbuUeUD o JUBWUOJIAUQ W9a1SAS y BulbuUeUD oO Setting the System Operation Environment Sets the controller s operation environment The following settings are available Reference Setting the Date and Time Date time Setting p 110 Reference Selecting the Language Language Setting p 110 Reference Setting the Fan Rotation Speed Fan Control Setting p 111 Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 112 Reference Setting the RUN Window Display RUN mode View Setting p 114 Reference Setting the RUN Window Shortcut Create Shortcut p 115 Reference Setting the Encoder Trigger Encoder Trigger Setting p 115 Reference Setting the STEP Input Detection Pulse Width STEP Setting p 116 Reference Setting the RUN Window Password Password Setting p 117 In addition the controller model and measurement application version can be checked Reference Checking System Information System Information p 119 Setting the Date and Time Date time Setting Confirm that the date and time on the embedded calendar are correct and make corrections if they are not The log data dates and times etc are set based on contents set here 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Date time setting The Date time Setting window is displayed 2 Set the date and time Current date furrent blew El July 2007 1 Ta
262. tes of which part of the model are to be output by the search and ECM search processing item The initial value is at the center of a model Candidate With regards to search based processing items search flexible search ECM search classification character inspection model dictionary both a rough search which is a search over the entirety of the measurement region and a detailed search which is a search in areas of the rough search where correlation was high are performed The candidate point is the point at which an area becomes a candidate for Detail search The candidate point level represents the rough search correlation value If stable search of a model is not possible set the candidate point level lower Sub pixel Points that are formed finer than pixels In the case of search processing if sub pixel processing is turned on for measurement parameters interpolation measurement is performed using sub pixel units Scene Measurement processing that is created with a combination of units Preparing a scene for each measurement object or measurement content makes it easy to change measurements Reference What Is a Scene p 28 2 2 Terminology Explanations FZ3 User s Manual Scene group 32 units are incorporated into a scene for sorted measurement This is convenient for managing scenes on a per category basis Reference What Is a Scene Group p 32 Center of gravity The images with white pixels are cut into paper o
263. that in no event shall Omron be responsi ble for warranty repair indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron s analysis confirms that the Products were prop erly handled stored installed and maintained and not subject to contamina tion abuse misuse or inappropriate modification Return of any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment Omron Compa nies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components Circuits system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environ ments Any advice recommendations or information given orally or in writing are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty See http www omron247 com or contact your Omron representative for pub lished information Limitation on Liability Etc OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY Further in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is asserted Indemnities Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron Companies and their employees from and against all liabilities lo
264. the System menu Controller Create shortcut Messurement seting SEP in g asure f ERROR ON ERROR OFF Ecene group s itch k Save scene groue on scene Flich foene switch Lime Add tilwe me Item Aeae Description Factory default p STEP in measure on nied aa E un ERROR OFF g J P J measurement Sets operation when scene group switching is performed Sets whether the scene group is saved Sayeseane dounon Checked when it is switened Iie scene group switching time can be reduced if the check is removed but if the scene switch Unchecked power is turned off without saving when settings have been changed the changed contents will be cleared The BUSY signal is turned on during scene switching When this time is short and the change from ON to OFF cannot be detected by external devices the BUSY signal ON time can be added This is set in 1 ms units The displayed value can be changed in 5 ms increments by tapping lt and gt Scene switch time O to 1000 Add time ms 10 108 Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement FZ3 User s Manual Note The settings of Save scene group on scene switch are linked with the settings of the Switch Scene Group window Settings specified later override the previous ones Reference Switching Scenes and Scene Groups p 50 3 Tap OK The display returns to the Main screen FZ3 User s Manual Setting Conditions Rela
265. tinal jon Folder name SEDI sk The window showing transfer status is displayed and the data is sent to the save destination 100 Saving Logging Images to RAMDisk USB Device FZ3 User s Manual Files can be copied or moved between the controller RAM Disk and USB memory Images and data saved on the RAM Disk are deleted if the power is turned off If you wish to keep these images and data copy or move them to the USB memory The types of files that can be copied moved are as follows Settings data scene data scene group data system data Logging Image Logging data Plug a USB memory device into the controller Nea On the Main screen tap Data Save to file The Save to File window is displayed 3 Tap Copy files and select the file or folder to copy or move Select folder Rais o Select file name j Setting item Copies or moves multiple files in a folder Tap and specify the source folder to copy move Select Tap and select the file format folder If All files is selected you can copy or move all files in the folder Select file When any of the file formats is selected you can specify the type of files extension in the folder to copy or move Select file Copies or moves the selected file name Tap and specify a file name 4 If you wish to delete the source file after saving a copy to USB memory check Delete original data after save
266. tinues for at least 100 ms 100u s 2 When there is chattering OFF STEP OFF is detected when the OFF status continues for 500 ms ON is detected when the ON status continues for at least 100 ms OFF SIEF ON OFF is detected when the OFF status continues for 500 ms 100u s 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller STEP setting 2 Set the filter width in the STEP setting area STEP signal filter width as 100 Tl Ok Cancel Set value a D aE Setting item Facom delad escription STEP signal filter width us Sets the filter width Setting the RUN Window Password Password Setting Operation on the RUN window can be locked with a password The following 3 operations can be locked Switching from the RUN window to the ADJUST window Performing simplified non stop adjustment on the RUN window Changing screen structure of the RUN window 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Controller Password setting The Password Setting window is displayed FZ3 User s Manual Setting the System Operation Environment 117 yu wuoJaug wazs S y BulbuUeUD o JUBWUOJIAUQ W9a1SAS y BulbuUeUD oO 2 Specify each of the following items Password seting Do not use a password ie Use D password Switch to ADJUET mode Simplified nor stop adjustment Control area operation Tool box operation Password changing
267. to 6 OFF About Multi input Function The function that enables continuous high speed image input is called the multiple image input function The next STEP signal can be received at the point when image input is complete It is not necessary to wait until measurement processing is complete Whether image input is complete or not can be checked with the status of the READY signal Even if the READY signal is on when measurement processing is being executed the next STEP signal can be received If STEP is input while READY is OFF the ERROR terminal turns on 190 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual portant ccc Set the image mode to Freeze When loading images consecutively at high speed there are restrictions on the number of images that can be loaded In the condition in which the maximum number of images that can be loaded have been loaded the READY signal is not turned ON until the measurement processing is complete Therefore the next STEP cannot be input Reference About Max Number of Loading Images during Multiple Image Input p 295 STEP input STEP input STEP input STEP input OFF STEP D ON Image Input OFF 2 READY ON measurement processing OFF BUSY ON portant ccc Even if the image mode is Through the multi input function can be used Note however that the READY signal is always off at this time and whether image input is comple
268. to 99999 Set the communication Address O address Response area CIO Area ClO Work Area WR Holding Bit Area HR Set the communication Auxiliary Bit Area AR area DM Area DM EM Area EMO Area 128 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual 0 to 99999 Set the communication magleee 100 address Data output area CIO Area ClO Work Area WR Areg Holding Bit Area HR Set the communication Auxiliary Bit Area AR area DM Area DM EM Area EMO Address 0 to 99999 Set the communication 200 address Retry interval ms 1000 to 999999 Set the communication 10000 retry interval 5 Tap OK The settings are confirmed and the serial interface window closes Checking Communication Status Use PLC tools etc to check the communication status Memory Allocation PLC Link This section explains allocations for each area including the command area response area and output area Command Area PLC to Controller FZ3 Command area top channel 19 11 10 9 8 7 6 4 3 2 Name 7 et et pt controt input i pt ttt tp tt e L L l faee 2 TO Command code 3 CMD CODE 2CH 4 5 6 a Command 8 parameter _ CMD PARAM 9 Length 10 changeable CMD EXE Executes commands DSA Requests the next data output CMD CODE Stores command codes FZ3 User s Manual Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link
269. to the settings of the Measurement Setting window Reference Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement p 108 3 Tap OK The scene group is switched and the screen returns to the Scene Maintenance window DE ccc When a check is inserted in Save scene group on switch scene data may be lost if the power is cut off during scene group switching During scene group switching make sure that the power is not cut off FZ3 User s Manual Switching Scenes and Scene Groups 51 MO 4 JUsLUaINSes sauss Buas MO 4 JUSLUaINSes sauss Bues Copies and pastes scenes within a scene group This is a convenient function for reusing a created scene with only one portion being changed 1 On the Main screen tap Scene Scene maintenance The Scene Maintenance window is displayed 2 In the scene list tap the source scene to copy and then tap Copy 3 In the scene list tap the scene to which the copy is to be pasted and then tap Paste The confirmation window for overwriting is displayed 4 Tap Yes The copied scene data is written over the scene selected as the destination 5 Tap Close Clear scene settings and return to factory default values This section describes how to initialize measurement contents for each scene 1 On the Main screen tap Scene Scene maintenance The Scene Maintenance window is displayed 2 Tap the scene to be cleared from scene list
270. ttings Startun petting Set Specify startup scene scene group Scene group Sce Select startup mode f ADJUST t RUH Measureaent manager bar state i Doen C Close Operation priority f Measurement result priority Menu operation priority Weosurement initializetion priority f Measurement trigger receipt priority Processing of re draving on screen priority Communication module select cerial Ethernet j Worms Serlal RS 2326 422 Normal Paral lel Standard Parallel 1 0 112 Setting the System Operation Environment FZ3 User s Manual Set value Factory default Checked Specify startup scene scene grouP Unchecked Scene groups 0 to 31 Scene group 0 ae Scenes 0 to 31 Scene 0 ADJUST RUN Item Scene Select startup mode Description The selected scene scene group will be the scene scene group at start up The scene scene group set in the controller when Data save is executed will be the scene scene group at start up Selects the scene group displayed at Start up Selects the scene displayed at start up Selects whether the ADJUST window or RUN window is displayed at start up Measurement manager Open bar state Close Measurement result priority Menu operation priority Measurement trigger receipt priority Operation priority Measurement initialization priority Processing of re drawing on sc
271. tween STEP STGOUT STGOUTO pulse width steouT1 OFF 3 ON 1e gt Delay between STEP STGOUT STGOUT1 pulse width 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Camera Inter camera setting The Inter camera Setting window is displayed 2 Tap of each item and set values Delay t lee STEP cameral delay i a 0 122 ms STEP cameral delay tas O 122 us STEP camera delay D 0 122 ws STEP camerad delay sas O 122 ese DE Cancel Item Sa Description Factory default P STEP Camera 0 delay STEP Camera 1 delay 0 to 511 STEP Camera 2 delay STEP Camera 3 delay Set delay between receiving the STEP signal and the beginning of camera exposure Delay time count x 30 us 122 us 1 count 30 us Max 15 ms 3 Tap OK The settings are confirmed and the Inter camera Setting window closes FZ3 User s Manual Setting Conditions for Camera Use 107 JUBWUOJIAUQ wazs S y BulbuUeUD o JUBWUOJIAUQ W9a1SAS y BulbuUeUD oO Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement With operation during measurement the following items can be changed Operation when the next STEP signal is input during measurement Saving of scene groups during scene group switching 1 On the Main screen tap the Measure menu Measure setting The Measurement Setting window is displayed 2 Set each item as required When they are not displayed create settings through
272. udgement unmeasured 0 Judge Get only 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG Unit that outputs images subject to reset 120 Target unit Set Get 0 to 9999 s jqe sousduejey jeuIe xXy 198 Input image FZ3 User s Manual Measurement Search 0 No judgement unmeasured 0 Judge 1 Judgement result OK 1 Judgement result NG 5 Correlation value O to 100 6 Measure X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 7 Measure Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 Measure angle 180 to 180 9 Reference X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 10 Reference Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 11 Reference angle 180 to 180 12 Detected coordinate X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 13 Detected coordinate Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 14 Count 0 to 32 101 Output Coordinates O ARET SCION 1 Before scroll i 0 OFF 102 Calibration Set Get 4 ON 0 ON 103 Reflect to overall judgement 1 OFF 420 eR ne 0 Correlation 1 Shape 0 OFF 121 With rotation Set Get 4 ON 122 Upper limit of the rotation angle Set Get 180 to 180 123 Lower limit of the rotation angle Set Get 180 to 180 124 Skipping angle Set Get 1 to 30 0 OFF 0 OFF 134 Sub pixel Set Get 1 ON 136 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 137 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 138 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 FZ3 User s Manual Measurement 199 sojqe soudJajoy jeule xXy sojqe soudJajoy eu1 x7 139 Lower limit of measure Y Set Get 99999 9999 to
273. ulweys juUswWeiNses s L Buiwload v uogesado BulweysjuUswWeiNses s BUIWOLIEd Oo ADJUST Window and RUN Window After test measurement and remeasurement are performed check the measurement results If there are problems adjust the processing item setting values of the processing units If the measurement results are stable switch to the RUN window and perform measurement This section describes the ADJUST window and RUN window ADJUST Window fee Were Herua Pula fyshem Help Judgement ADIUST ine E Edite Pl Data sro Yh Scano switch result amg bore z measurement 18ms p TEN Smib bo AL mona Hime kor ER entire scene are displayed 5 Search The unit with MG is displayed in red The measured Bh oD object can be i depisyod E displayed Camera image X 323 9 Y 240 5 AREA 1035 capa CE LED ai H The measurement resul The current display settings is displayed in text are shown Also you can change the display settings here RUN Window There are two types of RUN windows Normal mode and fast view mode Change the display speed according to the intended use Note Switching method for RUN window normal mode and fast view mode Reference Switching the RUN Window to Fast View Mode Select RUN mode p 74 Method for setting display contents of RUN window Reference Setting the RUN Window Display RUN Mode View Setting p 114 60 AD
274. values required for setting the judgement conditions and communication specifications Methods for setting up values include the following depending on the settings Specify values directly with the numeric keyboard This is used for input of specific values Set numerical values by dragging the slider Setting values can be done by dragging the slider on the screen The method for displaying the numeric keyboard and setting values is explained here For other methods refer to individual setting descriptions 1 Tap in the item in which a value is to be set bt The numeric keyboard is displayed 2 Tap the numeric keys to input values The numerical value is input 3 Tap OK This verifies the value and closes the numeric keyboard Inputting Text This section describes methods for inputting file names and descriptive text FZ3 User s Manual Basic Knowledge about Operations 275 sexipueddy joo sexipueddy The following software keyboard is displayed in the window for inputting text a Japanese Input Mode Japanese is input using kana input To toggle between uppercase and lowercase mode tap A a b Symbol one byte characters input mode c a Alphanumeric Input Mode To switch between uppercase and lowercase mode tap A a The default state is lowercase input mode Operation Method 1 Tap in the item in which a character string is to be set The sof
275. vironment ccccccc cc ene 105 Setting Conditions for Camera Ol tr 106 Checking Camera Connections Camera Connection OCP CCP PCCP CCOS OCS eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 106 Setting Trigger Delay Inter camera Setting SPCC P Peer eee cere reer errr rere reer eee rece eee eee ee ee ee eee eee eee ee 106 Setting Conditions Related to Operation during Measurement s rsrrrrtrtrtreretetet eter eter et et etree eee es 108 Setting the System Operation Environment ttt t tt eee eae eee eee eaaaeeeaaaeee 110 Setting the Date and Time Date time Setting Cee Perec rere reer rere e cree errr cree eee eee eee eee eee eee ee 110 Selecting the Language Language Setting ECCT PCCP eee CeCe Perec ere e errr reece ree eee ee eee eee eee eee eee ee 110 Setting the Fan Rotation Speed Fan Control Setting eee Pee eee e eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 111 2 FZ3 User s Manual Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting ae ada at ates aac ta etait a a wate alsa tac wha te marae eae Saeed ata epee areata atahata ee 1 12 Setting the RUN Window Display RUN mode View Setting OCPCCECUOCOCCUOCOOCUOOCOOUSOCOSCOSC OS eee 114 Setting the RUN Window Shortcut Create Shortcut nnnnunnnununnnnnnnnununnnanunnnnnnnnnnunnnnnunnnnunnn 115 Setting the Encoder Trigger Encoder Trigger Setting nu nunnuununnunnunnunnunnuununnununnnnnnNnENNENNN 115 Setting the STEP Input Detection Pulse Width STEP Setting s rtrtrrrtrrrtrttett eet etet ee ee teense 116 Setting the RUN Win
276. w and each unit idre Fogli lan Search 1 Moves to the top processing unit with an NG error 2 Moves to the next processing unit with an NG error Note The size of the processing unit buttons can be changed through View menu Display the enlarged flow in the ADJUST Window Detail result The detailed measurement results of the processing units selected in the measurement flow are displayed as text age O i Image display Sets the display method for the Image Display area Tool box Starts and stops simplified non stop adjustment and switches to the ADJUST window Items for which operation is performed in the ADJUST window can be allocated to buttons and they can then be executed in the RUN window Swich bo ALS T maie Uriter curng ail veel raph som atl 14 Layouts of Screens Windows FZ3 User s Manual d Measurement Manager Bar imir L mS ofi gt 1 2 1 Capture Saves the content displayed on the monitor as an image Reference Set the save destination for captured images p 92 2 LCD Off Displayed only with LCD integrated controllers Turns off power to the LCD monitor Tap the bottom of the monitor screen to turn on power to the LCD monitor again uo eJado aojag gt Layout of Edit Flow Window This window is for compiling the measurement flow Flow parts are displayed on the right side and the measurement flow is displayed on the left If the measurement trigg
277. ward or downward Copy Copies the selected processing unit Paste Pastes the copied processing unit immediately before the selected processing unit Pasting cannot be performed if any operations other than paste are performed after copying Delete Deletes the selected processing unit Append Bottom Adds a processing unit to the bottom of the flow Insert Inserts a new processing unit immediately before the selected processing unit New folder Used when multiple processing units are managed as one group Shift area Changes related figure data in one batch Multiple selection Used when processing units are copied or deleted together Set Displays the processing item setting window for the selected processing unit e Display Options Show guide When checked explanations for processing items are displayed Enlarge flow When checked the a Unit list flow is displayed with large icons Enlarge item tree When checked the f Processing item tree is displayed with large icons Ref other Scene s flow When checked other scene flows within the same scene group can be referred to f Processing Item Tree This area is for selecting processing items to add to the flow Processing items are classified by type and displayed as a tree Tapping the plus sign of any item displays expanded contents 16 Layouts of Screens Windows FZ3 User s Manual below that item Tapping the minus sign of any item collapses the expande
278. ware for receiving data When serial interface RS 232C 422 connection is used Communication specifications are performed according to the settings in Reference Setting Communication Specifications RS 232C 422 Non procedure p 147 150 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Example of input format SCENE command Scene No max 2 digits Enter a delimiter at the end of commands In this manual delimiters are expressed with Separate parameters with spaces Not required before delimiters In the following cases an error occurs The system quits abnormally and the return values are returned when an error occurs When non existing commands are specified The number of parameters is incorrect The range of the parameters is incorrect The content of parameters is incorrect When action cannot be ended correctly with an action instruction command portant Commands can be input and measurement results can be output only when the Main screen is at the front Cannot receive commands when setting windows or the Edit flow windows are displayed excluding Serial Confirmation On the Main screen even if the screen is switched to the Edit Flow window etc the data output after measurement will not be interrupted before all data is output Commands cannot be accepted when windows other than the Main screen are displayed Command List Non procedure This s
279. when the judgement result is OK or when it is an NG error The factory default setting is ON at NG Reference Setting Communication Specifications Parallel Interface p 178 Signal Output contents OR Signal Overall judgement results are output 182 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual Parallel Judgement Output The judgement results of judgement 0 to 15 set in the processing item Parallel Judgement Output are output to DO 0 to 15 Reference Processing Item List Manual Parallel Judgement Output p 406 Parallel Data Output The measurement values set in data 0 to 7 in the processing item Parallel Data Output are output in 16 bit format Reference Processing Item List Manual Parallel Data Output p 403 Only integers are output Decimals are rounded up The range of values that can be output is as follows When in binary format 32768 to 32768 When BCD format 999 to 999 When measurement values are outside of these ranges the following apply For binary format When measurement value is lt 32768 32767 is output When measurement value is gt 32768 32768 is output DO 0 to 15 For BCD format signal When measurement value is lt 999 999 is output When measurement value is gt 999 999 is output For the output format select from a 2 s complement binary format or BCD format For a definition of 2 s complement see Reference Terminology Explan
280. xplains timing charts for command response output and measurement commands 140 Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link FZ3 User s Manual Command to Response Command area PLC to FZ3 Response area FZ3 to PLC FZ3 User s Manual ON CMD CODE Command code OFF A CMD PARAM Command parameters OFF CMD EXE 1 Command execution bits CMD CODE Command code BUSY Command execution bits during execution RES CODE Response code RES DATA Response data CMD FLG Command completion bits 4 D 3 415 1 CMD CODE and CMD PARAM are set from the PLC and then CMD EXE is turned on The FZ3 receives an execution instruction 2 When the FZ3 receives the execution instruction BUSY is turned on and the command is executed 3 When the FZ3 completes execution CMD CODE RES CODE and RES DATA are set and then CMD FLG is turned on 4 The PLC confirms that CMD FLG has turned on and then CMD EXE is turned off 5 The FZ3 confirms that CMD EXE has turned off and then CMD FLG and BUSY are turned off 4 If CMD EXE is not turned off within the retry interval 0 to 999999 ms CMD FLG and BUSY are forcibly turned off Communicating through Serial Communication PLC Link 141 SOOINGQ JEUO XJ y m BuljealuNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt SOOINQQ JEUJO XJ uyim BuljealuNWWO pue BulJOsUUOD JO SPON gt Data Output 1st data output 2nd data output 4 5 LI gt 14 Di Command area ON
281. xxx method store to the controller then restart the system Reference Setting the Start up Status Startup Setting p 112 Use the same communication specification settings for the controller and the external device When making system settings Ethernet settings do not send external input into the Ethernet 1 On the Main screen tap the System menu Communication Serial Ethernet The Ethernet window is displayed 2 Set the following items ee eee eee a ee eee eee a ee ee eee a 146 Controlling Outputting through Serial Communication Non procedure FZ3 User s Manual Set value Factory default Setting item Address setting Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 IP address 10 5 5 100 Description Set the IP address of the controller When Obtain an IP address automatically is selected the IP address of the controller will be automatically obtained When Use the following IP address is selected set the IP address subnet mask and the default gateway address Input the controller IP address 0 0 0 0 to Subnet mask a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 Default gateway a b c d a 1 to 223 b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 10 5 5 1 DNS server 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 10 5 5 110 Input the subnet mask addre
282. y once for each measurement 1 unit for Judgement Output 1 data item for Data Output Reference Setting Communication Specifications Parallel Interface p 178 Only designate the STEP signal for measurement command input When measurement and continuous measurement are performed using serial commands the output time will not match and this can cause controller malfunctions Example Stepped transmission line utilizing star wheel The discharge timing for when a defective part is found and the measurement results output timing can be synchronized Discharging device i GATE DO Controller When Number of delay is set as 4 measurement results are output after 4 delays Inputting a measurement trigger in the STEP signal Example When 2 is set for Number of delay 188 Controlling Outputting through Parallel Communication FZ3 User s Manual RUN BUSY OR DO GATE Note Start Measurement Exit Measurement a ee ON STEP input STEP input STEP input STEP input STEP input ON PSESE lt _ Perform Measurement Final judgment Final judgment Final judgment Final judgmen y 77 4 of 1 of D of B iC 5 See ee r No results output K Resut of X Resut of X of X Result of X Result of x O oO 7 aL lt gt lt _ gt Rising time Output time The output signal functions the same as when Output Control is set to None Reference When Output Control Is Set to None p
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
Psychic Seduction Secrets Saber más - VER MANUAL R19 robot manual page 1 31-759型 取扱説明書 パックイン ガス風呂給湯器 外壁貫通設置型 SERVICE PARTS MANUAL 605271 Instruction Manual for Piston & Cylinder Bore Up Kit Kit, 68cc, for RUF-1 HH 1RUF-1 HS RUF-2 HH 1RUF 2007 - 埼玉県社会福祉協議会 le dossier des participants Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file